100%(1)Il 100% ha trovato utile questo documento (1 voto)
203 visualizzazioni194 pagine
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Multi-Purpose Sports Hall and Athletics Stadium 051200 structural steel Framing Specification. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Bolts, washers, and other steel accessories. 3. Shear studs. 4. Weldable steel connections. 5. Grout.
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Multi-Purpose Sports Hall and Athletics Stadium 051200 structural steel Framing Specification. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Bolts, washers, and other steel accessories. 3. Shear studs. 4. Weldable steel connections. 5. Grout.
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Multi-Purpose Sports Hall and Athletics Stadium 051200 structural steel Framing Specification. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Bolts, washers, and other steel accessories. 3. Shear studs. 4. Weldable steel connections. 5. Grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 26 3.1 EXAMINATION 26 3.2 PREPARATION 26 3.3 ERECTION 26 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS 27 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 28 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 29 King Abdullah Sports City
SECTION 0512 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel.
2. Bolts, washers, and other steel accessories
3. Shear studs.
4. Welded steel connections.
5. Grout.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent test- ing agency procedures and administrative requirements.
2. Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Dispos- al" and Sustainable Design Requirements.
4. Division 05 Section "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally ex- posed structural steel.
5. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear studs through deck.
6. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame miscellane- ous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel.
7. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs."
8. Division 05 Section Metal Grating.
9. Division 05 Section Decorative Metal.
10. Division 07 Section Applied Fireproofing.
11. Division 09 Section Paintings and Coatings for surface- preparation and priming requirements. King Abdullah Sports City
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows and subjected to special notch toughness, fabrication, welding and inspection requirements as defined in this specification:
1. Shapes included in ASTM A6 with flanges thicker than 50mm
2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 50mm.
3. Column base plates thicker than 50mm.
4. All ASTM A6 shapes with flange thickness greater than 1-1/2 inches (38mm) that are part of the Seismic Load Resisting System.
5. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 1-1/2 inches (38mm) if part of the Seismic Load Resisting System.
C. Design Story Drift: Difference in lateral deflections of the top and bottom of a story under consideration.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Review of submittals if of a general nature only, and responsibility for conformance with the intent of the Contract Documents shall remain with the Contractor. Review does not imply nor state that Contractor has correctly interpreted the Contract Drawings.
2. All submissions shall be in accordance with the submission schedule developed and agreed between the Company Representative and Contractor at the commencement of the project. Submission shall include dates of order and delivery of materials to the shop and the site.
3. Shop drawing schedule shall allow adequate time for reviews. Submittal shall include all related pieces in an assembled or area. The Contractor shall allow adequate time in shop drawing preparation stage for the dimensioning process and coordination with the Architectural Drawings and those of other disciplines. Submit a schedule for steel shop and erection drawings. Assume a maximum of one hundred drawings will be reviewed in any 10 working day peri- od.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components, including anchor rod setting plans, details of layout and connections, fabrication of all members, and element and erection plans. Direct copies of the Contract Documents are not acceptable as a submission from the Contractor.
1. Submit shop drawings to Architect for review and obtain Architects acceptance prior to start of fabrication. Where shop drawings are re- submitted, the Contractor shall cloud and identify all changes made King Abdullah Sports City
due to additions, deletions, and corrections to the shop drawing. Shop drawings resubmitted without each change being clouded and identified will be returned for resubmission.
2. Include layout, member size, and weights, materials used, and beam marks as well as orientation and relation of members to appropriate grid lines and setting elevations for column bases. Reference shop drawings to specific location and detail number on the Structural Drawings.
3. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, openings, doubler plates, stiffeners and other pertinent data, in- cluding bolt hole sizes, connection materials, and welded joint designations.
4. Include embedment drawings.
5. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Identify WPS applicable to each shop weld.
6. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
7. Indicate surface preparation and finishes.
8. Submit plans of all levels locating the edge of slab at perimeter and at interior openings.
9. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system.
10. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.
11. Identify demand critical welds.
D. Connection Design:
1. The Contractor is responsible for the design of connections when they are not fully defined on the Contract Documents.
2. At the commencement of the project submit a letter signed and sealed by a registered design professional that will supervise the steel connection design attesting to this responsibility. The registered design professional shall be appropriately qualified and have a mini- mum of 5 years experience post registration. The individual must be agreed by the Company Representative.
3. At the end of the steel shop drawing submission phase submit a let- ter, signed and sealed by the registered design professional super- vising the steel connection design, attesting to the completion of the work. King Abdullah Sports City
4. Submit calculations of all connections. Calculations and details shall be clearly keyed to the appropriate members on the construction documents. Calculations shall bear the seal of the registered design professional supervising design of the steel connections.
5. Contractor shall not proceed with steel erection until these requirements are fulfilled.
6. The Contractor shall not submit any piece drawing for review until all connections used on that drawing have been reviewed by the regis- tered design professional. Drawings submitted with connections that have not previously been submitted for review will be rejected as in- complete.
E. 3-D Detailing Model Review
1. The Contractor shall provide, and regularly update, a 3-D detailing model, referred to here as Design Model. Design Model shall be in a Tekla compatible format, to be used for preliminary review of steel- work and for coordination with other disciplines. The Design Model will be reviewed by the design team, ahead of piece drawing submit- tals, to reduce the number of re-submittals, and expedite drawing submittal review.
2. At the commencement of the detailing process, and before any piece drawings are submitted, the Contractor shall make available the lead detailer for a period of no less than 3 days, to work at a place desig- nated by the Company Representative to coordinate the Design Model, and discuss the detailing process.
3. Before any piece drawing submittal, the Contractor shall provide an update to the Design Model together with a report listing all the beams to be submitted, together with their connection codes. The Company Representative shall provide comments on the submitted pieces for the Detailer to incorporate before the corresponding piece drawings are submitted. Any piece drawings submitted without pre- viously being reviewed in the Design Model will be rejected.
4. The Company Representatives preliminary review of the Design Model is for general conformance only, and the Contractor shall still submit for review all erection plans and piece drawings as required by these specifications.
5. The Design Model shall contain at least the following: a. Entities that fully define each steel element and the extent of detailing of each element, including all information that would be included in a standard structural steel shop drawing. b. All steel elements identified in the Contract Documents as well as any other elements required for strength and stability of the completed erected structure.
F. Erection Procedures:
1. Submit procedures, methods, sequences of erection, temporary shoring and guying, and equipment proposed for erecting structural steel. Erection procedures are submitted for record only and there- fore will not be returned to the Contractor.
1. Submit shop drawings and technical specifications for the slide bearing assemblies used in the project.
H. Jacking and Tensioning Procedures:
1. Submit procedures, methods, sequences of jacking and tensioning, instrumentation and monitoring devices to be used in the project.
I. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," and AISC 341 Appendix W for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including items listed below. All submitted Procedures shall be reviewed by the independent approved agency for testing prior to use on the project. The Procedures will be submitted to the Engineer for record only.
1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).
2. Electrode and flux manufacturer and trade name.
3. Tolerances or the acceptable range of values, applicable to the various welding parameters.
4. Where back gouging is required provide back gouging criteria (e.g. smoothness, grinding, gouge shape, inspection by the welder, etc.).
5. For multi-pass welds define sequence and layering of passes.
6. Welding Procedure Qualification Record (WPQR) Tests: For WPSs that are not pre-qualified per AWS D1.1, submit the supporting WPQR tests results conducted in accordance with AWS D1.1 along with the corresponding WPS.
7. When the required effective throat thickness of flare groove welds is larger than allowed by Table J2.2 of AISC Steel Construction Man- ual, submit data establishing by qualification the consistent produc- tion of such larger effective throat thickness. Qualification of effec- tive throat thickness shall be as required by the AISC specification.
8. For complete penetration butt or groove welds, include test records for the following only at locations specified on the drawings: tough- ness, (Charpy tests for weld metal), heat affected zone.
J. Weld Shrinkage and Distortion Procedures: Submit weld shrinkage and dis- tortion procedures for all welded connections where distortion due to weld shrinkage may cause damage to the steel material. The welding sequence and procedures are to minimize the effect of weld shrinkage, residual stress- es, and to maintain erection tolerances. These procedures shall be reviewed by independent approved agency for testing, and then used by agency to verify conformance. Procedures shall be submitted for all principal connec- tion types. The number and type of welded connections to be reviewed shall be subject to agreement with the Company Representative. These shall in- clude, but not limited to the following:
1. Welding of continuity plates and doubler plates.
2. Field welding.
3. Fabricated box sections. King Abdullah Sports City
K. Fastener Installation Procedures: Submit written procedures for the pre- in- stallation testing, installation snugging, pre-tensioning, and post-installation inspection of fasteners. The procedures shall meet all requirements of the Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) "Specification for Struc- tural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" and the Contract Documents.
L. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, professional engineer, independent approved agency for testing.
M. Welding certificates.
N. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
O. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical proper- ties, regardless of thickness or use. Reports shall comply with ASTM A6.
1. Submit a mill report for each heat of steel used, and certified fastener reports for all fasteners, including nuts, washers and direct tension indicators prior to the start of fabrication. For unsatisfactory mill test report, retest steel.
2. Include Charpy test results for heavy sections and for materials where Charpy values are specified.
3. Mill test reports shall include ladle analysis and tensile elongation and bend tests.
4. Mill reports shall be traceable to individual pieces of steel used.
5. In addition to other requirements mill reports shall address the following elements: copper, columbium, chromium, nickel, mo- lybdenum, silicone, and vanadium. 6. Provide mill reports for all welding consumables used on this project. P. Contractor Certificate of Compliance for Materials: Submit a Certificate of Compliance letter stating that the Contractor has reviewed the submitted manufacturers test reports and certifications, and that the materials being furnished for the project are in conformance with the applicable standards and project documents. The Certificate of Compliance letter shall be submitted along with the manufacturers test reports and certifications for structural steel, fasteners, welding filler metals, and shear studs.
Q. Product Test Reports and Certifications: Submit manufacturers test reports and certifications as listed below. Test Reports and Certifications are submit- ted for record only and therefore will not be returned to the Contractor. A copy of the test reports and certifications shall be sent to the owners Quality Assurance Agency. The Contractor Certificate of Compliance letter shall ac- company the Manufacturers Certifications. King Abdullah Sports City
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemi- cal analysis. Certifications for high strength bolts shall conform to certification requirements contained in ASTM A325, A490, F1852, F959, F2280.
4. Shear stud connectors. Shear studs, as supplied, shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1, Sections 7.2 and 7.3.
5. Shop primers.
6. Non-shrink grout.
7. Welding electrodes, fluxes and shielded gas products. Certifications shall satisfy the applicable AWS A5 and project requirements.
8. Spray-on fireproofing. Submit certificate issued by paint manu- facturer ensuring compatibility between the primer and the spray-on fireproofing.
R. Source quality-control reports.
S. Submit fabricators identification mark system to Testing Agency prior to fabrication.
T. As-Built Drawings: At the end of the work included in this Section submit a complete set of reproducible drawings incorporating all changes, additions and deletions to the Construction Drawings due to revisions, change orders, field conditions, or any other reason.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency: Approved Testing Agency: The Contactor shall engage an independent approved agency to perform tests and and prepare test reports. The selection of the independent approved agency shall be subject to the approval of the Company Representative. The Company Representative may, at his discretion, call for tests tor inspections to be verified by separate approved agency. Shop and field testing and inspection of steelwork speci- fied in this document or requested by the Company Representative will be performed by an independent approved agency.
1. The Testing Agency shall be furnished with the following: a. One complete set of fabrication and erection drawings. b. Material bills, cutting lists, order sheets and mill test reports. c. Information regarding time, place of rolling and shipment of materials to shop. d. If requested, representative sample pieces for testing. e. Full and ample means and assistance for testing materials. f. Access and facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, etc., for testing and inspection at all places where materials or components are stored, fabricated or erected in the mill, shop or field. g. Complete set of welding procedures. h. Welder qualifications. i. AISC fabricator certification documents, QA/QC manual and most recent AISC audit. j. Reports for all Contractor tests and inspections. King Abdullah Sports City
2. In addition to the work specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Testing Agency shall review the following for compliance with project specifications: a. Fastener Installation Procedures. b. WPSs and WPQRs. c. Manufacturers Test Reports and Certifications. d. Welder qualification.
B. Comply with applicable provisions of the current edition of the following speci- fications and documents, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. The 2009 International Building Code of the International Code Council (ICC) in its entirety, with all amendments, errata, and sup- plements thereto and the Saudi Building Code (SBC). In case of conflict the SBC shall take precedence
2. AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges.
3. AISC 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
4. AISC Specifications for Architectural Exposed Structural Steel.
5. AISC Steel Construction Manual.
6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." with supplements.
7. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 and D1.8.
8. Saudi Aramco Standard SAES-H-001: Selection Requirements for Industrial Facilities.
9. Saudi Aramco Standard SAES-H-100: Painting required for Industrial Facilities.
10. Saudi Aramco Standard SAES-H-101: Approved protective coating systems.
11. ASTM A6: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling.
12. ASTM A36: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
13. ASTM A53: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
14. ASTM A108: Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished
15. ASTM A193: Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
16. ASTM A307: Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
17. ASTM A320: Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service. King Abdullah Sports City
18. ASTM A325: Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
19. ASTM A370: Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products.
20. ASTM A449: Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use.
21. ASTM A490: Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
22. ASTM A500: Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
23. ASTM A563: Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts
24. ASTM A572: Standard Specification for High Strength Low-Alloy Columbium Vanadium Structural Steel.
25. ASTM A607: Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High- Strength, Low-Alloy, Columbium or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled.
26. ASTM A687: Standard Specification for High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs.
27. ASTM A770: Standard Specification for Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications.
28. ASTM A992: Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
29. ASTM C1107: Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout.
30. ASTM E94: Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination.
31. ASTM E164: Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments.
32. ASTM E165: Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry.
33. ASTM E488: Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.
34. ASTM E709: Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.
35. ASTM F436: Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
36. ASTM F959: Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
37. ASTM F1852: Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength King Abdullah Sports City
38. ASTM F2280: Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
39. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge De- sign Specifications.
40. ANSI/AISC 341-05 Seismic Provision for Structural Steel Buildings
C. All work shall be performed by qualified operators experienced in their field of work and as otherwise required by these specifications.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Cat- egory STD. The fabricator shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in similar types of fabrication. Fabricator shall be able to furnish evidence of ability, facilities, proficiency of personnel, and completed projects with similar structural systems.
E. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE or CSE. The erector shall have a minimum of 5 years expe- rience in similar types of erection. Erector shall be able to furnish evidence of ability, facilities, proficiency of personnel, and completed projects with similar structural systems.
F. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1, P2, P3 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."
G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 for each process, position and joint configuration. Each operator shall have been qualified as prescribed by AWS and shall be approved by the in- dependent approved agency. Qualification performed more than six months prior to the start of the welding by the welder is acceptable, provided written documentation is submitted showing that the welder has continued to use the applicable welding process on an ongoing basis since the test was conducted, with no lapse in service exceeding six months.
1. Welder Certificates shall be submitted to the independent approved agency prior to welding.
2. Require welders to retake the qualification test if, as determined by the Company Representative or the independent approved agency, there is a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. If the welder does not requalify, he shall not perform any welding on the project.
3. In addition to AWS D1.1 requirements on welder Qualification, qualify welders making welds with restricted access (such as welding the bot- tom flanges of girders to column flanges through cope or access holes in the girder webs) by using a mock-up assembly identical to the actual conditions of producing weldments in the field, using the approved WPS.
4. Welder qualification shall include passing the bend test [and Charpy tests when Charpy values are specified for the electrode. King Abdullah Sports City
H. Contractors Quality Control Plan: Quality Control includes the functions per- formed by the Contractor to ensure that the material and workmanship of structural steel construction meets the project specifications and applicable standards. The Contractor shall submit a Quality Control Plan that addresses all inspection issues, including fabrication/erection testing and inspection per AWS D1.1 and AISC 341 Appendix Q. The verification testing and inspection carried out by the independent approved agency does not relieve the contrac- tor of the responsibility for conducting their own quality control/inspection pro- gram to ensure the requirements of the Contract Documents have been met. The Contractors Quality Control Plan will be reviewed by the independent ap- proved agency.
I. Quality Control Inspector Qualifications: Along with Quality Control Plan, Contractor shall submit written qualifications for all inspectors to be assigned Quality Control functions for structural steel work, including general inspec- tion, bolting inspection, welding inspection, and non-destructive testing. Qualifications for welding inspectors shall show evidence of ability to monitor all WPS variables, check weld sizes, and visually detect weld defects.
J. Unidentifiable Materials: Materials delivered with certificates are classified as identifiable; those without certificates are classified as unidentifiable.
1. Testing of Unidentifiable Material: By Contractors testing agency; paid for by Contractor. a. General: Test material not identifiable by heat number and mill test or other acceptable manufacturer's identification per ASTM A370 as follows. b. Shear Studs: Each lot of 100 studs; tensile tests on 3 finished studs per AWS. c. Structural Shapes and Plates: From coupons taken from material; one tensile test and one bend test per 5 tons of each shape. d. High Strength Bolts: Each lot of 100 bolts; tensile tests on 2 bolts in full size and one tensile test on a 12mm diameter machined specimen. e. Other Materials: Test as directed.
K. Prefabrication and Preinstallation Conference: Prior to performing fabrication or erection work, there shall be a pre-fabrication and pre-erection meeting to review welding procedures, bolting procedures, and inspection requirements for all welding and bolting operations. The meeting shall include the following individuals: Owners Representative, Testing Agency, Special Inspector, Steel Fabricator and Erector personnel supervising the shop, field and Quality Control work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not handle structural steelwork until paint has thoroughly dried. Care shall be exercised to avoid abrasions and other damage.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. Material shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause dis- tortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed, to the King Abdullah Sports City
acceptance of the Company Representative, and at no additional cost to the Company. Materials showing evidence of damage will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the site.
C. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided the independent approved agency observes repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
D. Requirements for storage and handling of electrodes shall be per AWS D1.1. Additional requirements include:
1. Long term storage of weld consumables shall be indoors, where moisture or dew does not collect, and in undamaged manufacturers shipping bags, boxes, and containers.
2. Open Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) electrodes shall be com- pletely covered during hours of non-use (i.e., weekends, nights of nonuse, days of nonuse, etc.). Where rain or dew could be expected to collect (i.e., open floors of erection site, open shop bays, etc.), electrodes shall also be covered.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Surveys: Contractor shall conduct field surveys and field verification as required to incorporate existing conditions from previous works, such as foundations and existing buildings, to the work before shop drawings are produced.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
C. Notify the Company Representative in sufficient time prior to shop or field fabrication or erection to permit testing and inspection without delaying work.
D. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIALS
A. All materials are subject to the Owners Representative's approval.
B. All structural steel shapes shall be new, unused and perfect stock, free from millscale, rust, flake, pitting, and imperfections, without bends, kinks, and dis- tortions. Shop splicing of members shall only be permitted if the member ex- ceeds maximum mill length, or if approved by the Owners Representative and so shown on the drawings. King Abdullah Sports City
C. All columns, beams, purlins, channels, angles, and plates shall conform to :
Fabricated/plated sections ASTM A572M GRADE 345 Wide flange ASTM A992M GRADE 345 WT ASTM A992M GRADE 345 Channel ASTM A572M GRADE 345 Angle ASTM A36M GRADE 250 Plate ASTM A36M GRADE 250 Built up ASTM A572M GRADE 345 Round HSS ASTM A500 GRADE 315 Rectangular HSS ASTM A500 GRADE 315 Doubler and stiffener plates ASTM A572M GRADE 345 Other connection material ASTM A36M GRADE 250 CHS EN 10219 or EN 10210 GRADE 355
Note : CHS sections may be adopted in the design subject to verification of grade by appropriate mill certificates and agreement with the Company Representative. Structural steel materials and shapes equivalent to ASTM materials maybe used as substitutes in accordance with Appendix 1 of Aramco 12-SAMSS-007 standard.
D. Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A500, Grade B Alternative yield stresses may be proposed by the Contractor and may be adopted subject to agreement with the Company Representative.
E. Steel tube shapes shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B or C Alternative yield stresses may be proposed by the Contractor and may be adopted subject to agreement with the Company Representative.
F. Heavy Sections: Heavy sections as defined in this specification shall have toughness properties meeting a Charpy V-Notch (CVN) value of 27 joules at 21 degrees C [20 ft-lb at 70 degrees F]. Testing shall be conducted in accordance with the current AISC specification.
G. Through Thickness Properties.
1. The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all steel plate complies with the requirements of the specified standard and has adequate through thickness properties to satisfy the requirements of his welding procedures and welding sequence and that all material at or adjacent to welded locations is free from laminations, centerline seg- regation or other crack like indications on completion of welding. The contractor is responsible for determining the quality class of the steel with enhanced through thickness properties which may be required (depending on plate thickness). For example BS EN 10164 or ASTM A770.
2. Not less than three weeks prior to ordering the steel , the steelwork contractor shall submit, for the Company Representative to review, a report which documents the contractors strategy (material selection, welding procedure and inspection) which will be implemented for controlling through thickness stresses during welding and ensuring the above criteria are satisfied. Levels of testing of both steel plate and welds, before and after fabrication, to ensure the above criteria are satisfied are to be submitted to the Company Representative for review not less than three weeks prior to fabrication.
H. Built-up structural sections, with physical dimensions and geometrical and struc- tural properties equal to the rolled steel sections shown on the drawings, may be substituted for the rolled section provided the following requirements are met: King Abdullah Sports City
1. Built-up sections shall be fabricated by a recognized manufacturer with a minimum of five years of experience in the fabrication of these sections.
2. All quality control procedures and testing methods shall be submitted to the Company Representative for approval prior to fabrication of the sections.
I. Members fabricated through cold forming process shall have a minimum yield strength of 345 MPa) and conform to the physical specifications of ASTM A607, Grade 50.
2.2 WELDING MATERIALS
A. Welding Material: Filler metal requirements shall conform to AWS D1.1 and AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings". Minimum classified tensile strength of 70 ksi (483N/mm, E70). Use low hydrogen electrodes as defined by AWS D1.1, unless noted otherwise. For all CJP welds used on Heavy Structural Sections that are not part of the Seismic Load Resisting System the filler metal shall have a Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness of at least 27 joules at 21 degrees C (20 ft-lb at 70 degrees F).
2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Structural Bolts: Shall be unfinished conform to ASTM A325 or ASTM A490. B. All structural bolts except ASTM A490 or ASTM A490M shall be galvanized in accordance with 12-SAMSS-007. ASTM A490 and ASTM A490M Bolts shall not be galvanized.
C. All ASTM A490 or ASTM A490M bolts to external steel connections shall re- ceive a corrosion protection system equivalent to APCS 1F in accordance with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101 after fixing. All ASTM A490 or ASTM A490M bolts to internal steel connections shall receive a corrosion protection system equivalent to APCS 1B in accordance with 12- SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101 after fixing.
D. All other mechanical fasteners shall be galvanized in accordance with 12- SAMSS-007
E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts unless noted otherwise; ASTM A563, Grade C, heavy- hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. ASTM F1852 Twist-Off Type Torque Control Bolts are a suitable alternative to ASTM A325 bolts, although use of such bolts shall not negate the requirement that Direct Tension Indicators be used for inspection.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 325, compressible- washer type with plain finish. Use on all A325 bolts where slip- critical or fully pre-tensioned bolts are required.
F. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts, where noted on drawings; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon- steel washers with plain finish. ASTM F2280 Twist-Off Type Torque Control Bolts are a suitable alternative to ASTM A490 bolts, although use of such King Abdullah Sports City
bolts shall not negate the requirement that Direct Tension Indicators be used for inspection.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 490, compressible- washer type with plain finish. Use on all A490 bolts where slip- critical or fully pre-tensioned bolts are required.
G. Unfinished Bolts and Nuts (Machine Bolts) and Threaded Rods: ASTM A307, Grade A, low carbon steel bolts and nuts; ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
H. Shear Studs: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 or 1020, headed-stud type, cold- finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B and conform to requirements of AWS D1.1 Section 7.
I. Anchor Bolts: Conform to ASTM A307 or ASTM A36 for standard strength and ASTM A449 or ASTM A687 for high strength anchor bolts.
J. Expansion Bolts: Conform to ASTM A193, A320, or A325. Test per ASTM E- 488.
K. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55, weldable per section S1 and CVN toughness of at least 20 ft-lbs at 65 degrees F per sec- tion S4
L. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55, weldable, straight.
1. Nuts: ASTM A563 [heavy-] hex carbon steel.
2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36 carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
M. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A193, Grade B7, ASTM A354, Grade BD, ASTM A449, A572, Grade 50.
1. Nuts: ASTM A563 [heavy-]hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened, ASTM A36 carbon steel. O. Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1035. Dimensions and minimum capacities to conform to the values listed in AISC Steel Construction Manual.
P. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1030.
Q. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1018. Minimum proof load of sleeve nuts shall be such that when King Abdullah Sports City
loaded axially the sleeve nut shall be stronger than the ultimate capacity of the connected parts.
R. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with performance requirements and agreement of the Company Representative, pro- vide products by one of the following available manufacturers offer- ing products in compliance with AASHTO LRFD Specifications that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ekspan b. BASF Wabo c. Amscot Structural Products Corp. d. Fluorocarbon Company Limited. e. R.J. Watson Bridge & Structural Engineered Systems. f. Seismic Energy Products, L.P. .
2. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and mirror-finished stainless steel.
3. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.03
2.4 PRIMER
A. Comply with Division 09 Section Paintings and Coatings and "High- Performance Coatings".
B. Primer Paint shall comply with Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards SAES- H-001, SAES-H-100 and SAES-H-101 and shall be compatible with finish paints and intumescent coatings.
C. Primer:
1. Typical Interior Primer: Saudi Aramco Approved Coating System APCS-1B in accordance with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES- H-101.
2. Typical Exterior Primer: Saudi Aramco Approved Coating System APCS-1E in accordance with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES- H-101.
D. VOC Content of Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Anticorrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.
E. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded.
F. Reinstate all primer where damaged during erection. G. All painting shall be according to SAES-H-100. King Abdullah Sports City
A. Grout shall have a minimum 2400 psi (16MPa) compressive strength in 48 hours and 6000 psi (60MPa) compressive strength at 28 days.
1. Conbextra HF cementitious grout or equal.
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.6 CONNECTION DESIGN
A. Contractor shall design all steel connections.. B. Type of Connections 1. All connections shall be one of the following: a. High-strength bolts assemblies. b. Unfinished bolts assemblies. c. Welds.
2. When the type of connection is outlined on the Drawings use that type of connection unless otherwise approved in writing by the Company Representative.
3. Use a connection other than unfinished bolts where required by code and in the following locations: a. All beam and column connections and splices. b. Connections that are a part of the lateral force resisting system. c. Connections for supports of running machinery or of other live loads which produce impact. d. Connections carrying cooling tower loads. e. Beams supporting columns or posts. f. Connections for cantilevers. g. Full and partial moment connections. C. Design Criteria. 1. Design connections for the loads and according to the requirements in the Contract Documents and the applicable standards as set out in The Site Wide Technical Brief Structures.
2. Bolts shall be at least 20mm in diameter.
D. The Drawings the intent for typical connection types. The Contractor shall adopt such connection typologies unless otherwise agreed by the Company Representative.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, AISC 360. Sub assemblies are to be assembled on site at ground level in controlled conditions. King Abdullah Sports City
1. Camber structural-steel members where required. Fabricate beams and girders with natural camber upward, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6 and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Members shall be fabricated for delivery in a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel.
4. Splice members only where accepted by the Company Representative.
5. All hollow members exposed to weather shall be provided with weep holes at appropriate locations to prevent the potential accumulation of water.
6. Grind burrs, sharp arrises and ragged edges that would prevent solid seating of the connected parts.
7. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. An unguided torch may be used provided the cut is within 3mm of the required line. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
1. Use standard holes. Holes shall be drilled or punched at right angles to the surface of the metal. Making or enlarging holes by burning is prohibited.
2. Flame cut holes for fasteners are not acceptable.
3. Holes in column baseplates shall be no more than 10mm larger than the nominal bolt size.
4. For the following conditions holes shall be drilled (not punched), even where punching is allowed by referenced standards: a) material hav- ing a thickness in excess of 22mm or the hole diameter; b) column base plates; c) holes less than 150mm from an edge that requires a CJP weld; d) where holes are subjected to welding shrinkage stresses.
D. Bending Steel Plate:
1. Bend plates perpendicular to the rolling direction.
2. Grind flame cut plate edges transverse to the bend line.
3. Grind out nicks in plate edges transverse to the bend line.
4. Round sharp corners on plate edges transverse to the bend line. King Abdullah Sports City
E. Heat Straightening: Will be permissible by the use of properly controlled heat, skilled personnel, proper equipment and in accordance with documents pre- pared by the fabricator and accepted. Reject materials that contain kinks or sharp angles. Material straightened prior to fabrication shall be rejected where it shows signs of distress or defects.
F. Planing and Milling: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. Mill bearing surfaces to true planes. Mill ends of columns perpendicular to centerline axis connection mid-depth points at ends of member. Cut and fit column and bearing stiffeners in manner to provide bearing over entire cross section
1. Column Base Plates a. From 50mm through 100mm Thickness: Straighten by pressing. b. Over 100mm Thickness: Plane top for column bearing; plane bottom when bearing on steel.
G. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
H. Shear Studs: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear studs. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear studs ac- cording to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members.
1. Provide holes, slots and openings together with necessary reinforcing as shown on the Drawings required for securing work of other trades to the work specified here. Where openings are shown on the Draw- ings no change shall be permitted without prior approval. Openings shall be done in the shop.
2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.
3. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, [mechanically thermal cut,] or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.
4. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
J. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with requests form inspection and testing personnel for access to the connections and joints to be inspected and tested. This includes beam and column turning in shop, weld backing re- moval when nondestructive examination indicates rejectable conditions, and access to platforms or scaffolding as required to perform the work safely.
2.8 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. General Bolting:
1. Product containers must be marked with lot numbers and traceability information so that correspondence with mill reports can be estab- lished. Manufacturers symbol and grade markings shall appear on all bolts, nuts, through-hardened washers and direct tension indicators. King Abdullah Sports City
2. Bolts shall be of a length that will extend to a point at least flush with the surface of the nuts, though not more than a length equal to the height of the nut, beyond the nuts unless otherwise noted.
3. Bolts shall be installed with threads excluded from the shear plane.
4. Washers shall be used on all bolts. Use beveled washers where bolts bear on sloping surface.
B. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. Contact surfaces of bolted parts shall as a minimum comply with the Class A requirements.
1. Joint Type shall be as noted on drawings.
2. Direct tension indicator (load indicating washers or "Tension-Set" bolts) method shall be used at slip-critical connections. "Turn-of-Nut" methods are not an acceptable alternative.
3. When connection has bolts and welds, fully tighten bolts prior to welding with the exception that in moment connections the flange welds shall be completed prior to final tightening of high strength bolts.
4. When already tensioned bolts have had their tension relaxed, replace the bolt and tension indicator and re-tighten.
C. Unfinished Bolts (Machine Bolts): Machine bolts shall be brought to a snug tight condition. Mutilate bolt threads for unfinished bolts to prevent the nuts from backing off.
D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Shop welds shall be inspected in the shop before the work is painted or shipped.
2. Weld sizes where shown shall be assumed to be effective weld sizes.
3. All groove or butt welds shall be full penetration unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
4. Where structural steel members are to remain exposed in the fin- ished work, welds exposed to view shall be uniformly made and ground smooth to the acceptance of the Company Representative. The acceptance criteria shall be tested and agreed using mock-ups of architecturally sensitive connections. The Company Representa- tive will specify the number and the location of mock-ups required.
5. Weld tabs shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. In addition, weld tabs shall extend beyond the edge of the joint a distance equal to the plate thickness but not less than 25mm except at access holes in beam/girder webs and at continuity plate clips. Weld tabs shall be oriented parallel to the joint preparation and to the weld direction. Weld dams are not allowed. King Abdullah Sports City
6. Remove weld tabs and backup plates and grind surfaces smooth as required for inspection or testing. Where tabs or backup bars inter- fere with architectural treatment or are exposed to view in the final structure, remove and grind smooth. Backup bars and run-off tabs at Heavy Structural Sections shall be removed.
7. Splices of members in tension, all members of moment frames and all members of braced frames that are made from heavy steel sec- tions shall be made in conformance with Section J1.5 of AISC 360.
8. Weld variables shall be consistent with the recommendations of the electrode manufacturer.
9. Do not weld into column flange-to-web intersection as defined the AISC k and k1 distances except for the doubler plate to column welds. Continuity plate welds shall stay clear of this area as noted on the drawings.
10. Sequence the work as necessary to accommodate testing.
11. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
12. Welding Procedures: a. Weld only in accordance with the Welding Procedure Specifi- cations. WPS shall be readily available to all welders, in- spectors, and supervisors during the production process. b. Consider toughness and notch sensitivity of steel in for- mation of the welding procedures to prevent brittle and premature fracture during fabrication and erection. Toughness requirements are to match those of the parent metal. c. Weld in a manner to minimize accumulation and concentra- tion of through-thickness strains due to weld shrinkage. Se- quence welds in a manner to reduce residual stresses (caused by welding) to a minimum value. Welding proce- dures shall incorporate measures necessary to eliminate cracking. d. Do not mix different electrodes in the same weld joint unless the interactions have been shown not to cause problems. e. Stringer passes only, no weaving or wash passes. Manipulation of the electrode for vertical welds (oscillation) shall be kept to a maximum movement of 4 to 5 electrode diameters. f. Welding shall not begin until joint elements are bolted or tacked in intimate contact and adjusted to dimensions shown in the Drawings, with proper allowance for any weld shrink- age. g. All tack welds shall be of the same quality as final welds. Preheat of tack welds is only necessary at the immediate ar- ea where the tack is placed. Preheat temperature is the same as for welding. Tack welds must be placed where they will be consumed in the weld, or be ground out to a depth of 3mm but not rewelded unless the gouge is greater than 3mm. If rewelding is necessary, it shall then be considered a new weld with all relevant weld inspections.
13. Refer to the Structural Drawings for additional requirements. King Abdullah Sports City
14. Reinforcing bars welded to steel plates shall be in accordance ACI 318 and with the Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel ANSI/AWS D1.4 of the American welding Society. ASTM reinforcing bar specifications, except for ASTM A 706, shall be supplemented to require report of material properties necessary to conform to the re- quirements in ANSI/AWS D1.4. In accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4 the contractor is to prepare and submit written welding procedure specifications conforming to the Welding Code. The form shown in Appendix A of the Welding Code is to be used and this shows the in- formation required for such a specification for each joint welding pro- cedure.
2.9 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime all steel surfaces excepting the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 50mm.
2. Surfaces to be field welded and areas within 100mm on each side of field welds.
3. Top surfaces of beams to receive metal deck.
4. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted. . Areas with high-strength bolts exposed to the weather shall receive a primer coat compatible with slip-critical type connections.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
6. Machined surfaces.
7. Welded shear studs.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the applicable Saudi Aramco specification requirements for each primer.
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by the man- ufacturer to provide the minimum dry film thickness for the Saudi Aramco corrosion protection system specified. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
3. Provide adequate measures to demonstrate to client representative minimum thickness of dry film are being achieved. This method should be submitted for approval prior to application. Note the dry film thickness values are minimums and are NOT nominal or mean values permitting any negative tolerance.
D. All internal structural steel members, where fire protection is not required shall receive corrosion protection equivalent to APCS-1B in accordance with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101 and the Site Wide Technical Brief - Structures. King Abdullah Sports City
E. All internal structural steel members, where fire protection is required shall receive corrosion protection equivalent to APCS-1B in accordance with 12- SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101, and shall additionally incorporate an appropriate intumescent coating and sealer to achieve the required fire rating and appearance.
F. All external structural steel members, where fire protection is not required shall receive a corrosion protection system equivalent to APCS 1F in ac- cordance with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101 and the Site Wide Technical Brief - Structures.
G. All external structural steel members, where fire protection is required shall receive corrosion protection equivalent to APCS-1F in accordance with 12- SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101, and shall additionally incorporate an appropriate intumescent coating and sealer to achieve the required fire rating and appearance. Where the Contractor can demonstrate that a modi- fied system utilizing intumescent coatings in place of the barrier coat provides equivalent corrosion protection performance, the barrier coat may me omitted.
H. All openings for bolt access holes and the like in hollow sections to have a closing piece, where not detailed or required as part of the connection de- sign, welded with a continuous weld to seal the section following installa- tion, bolt tightening and final inspection. Also applies to otherwise open ends of hollow sections
I. The following surfaces shall be temporarily protected by a thin coating of varnish or lacquer: 1.Unpainted areas around fillet welds. 2. Steel around high strength bolts. 3. Machined surfaces.
2.10 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A123 and to bolts, nuts, and washers according to ASTM A153 that connect galvanized components, except that ASTM A490 bolts shall not be hot-dip galvanized.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Independent approved agency to perform shop tests and in- spections as defined by AWS, AISC and these specifications. The selection of the independent approved agency shall be subject to the approval of the Company Representative Testing Agency shall summarize their finding in in- spection and testing reports. Reports shall identify any findings that are not in compliance with requirements of the project specifications. The Company Representative may, at his discretion, call for tests tor inspections to be veri- fied by a separate approved agency
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspec- tions.
B. See Part 1 of this specification for additional testing and inspection require- ments. As a minimum the inspector will make all tests and inspections as re- quired by the International Building Code 2009 and the Saudi Building Code. Testing Agency will make all the tests and inspections. The King Abdullah Sports City
Contractors Quality Control Plan, including proposed extent of testing and inspection shall be reviewed and approved by the Company Representative.
C. Contractor shall correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.
1. Company Representative reserves right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with requirements.
2. Any tests that may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of cor- rected work, shall be at Contractor's expense.
D. Each person installing connections shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and all shop and field connections shall be so identified so that the In- spector can refer back to the person making the connection.
E. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
1. High Strength Bolted Connections: High strength bolts specified as Snug-Tight (ST) need not be inspected for bolt tension. For high strength bolts specified as Slip-Critical (SC), verify that 10% or a minimum of 2 bolts per connection are tensioned in accordance with the RCSC Specification.
Direct Tension Indicators: Observe all Direct Tension Indicators to see if proper tightness was achieved.
2. Standard Bolted Connections: Testing Agency shall inspect the in- stallation of A307 bolts to verify that 20% of all bolts or a minimum of 2 bolts per connection are installed properly and tightened to a Snug-Tight (ST) condition.
F. Welded Connections:
1. Testing Agency shall be present during all welding operations. In addition to visual inspection, all shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and this specification using the following inspection procedures: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection (PT): ASTM E165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection (MT): ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of in- complete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection (UT): ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection (RT): ASTM E94.
2. Visual Inspection of Welding: Testing Agency shall visually inspect all shop and field welding of structural steel accordance with the governing building code and AWS D1.1. Visual inspection of welds shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Verify: Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) sheet has been provided and has been reviewed with each welder making the weld, welder qualification and identification, fit-up meets tolerances of WPS and mark joint prior to welding, welding consumables are per the Contract Documents and the WPS, amperage and voltage at the arc with hand-held meters, meters on welding equipment are functioning and accurate. King Abdullah Sports City
b. Observe preheat and interpass temperatures, weld pass sequence and size of weld bead. c. Multi-pass shop and field welds shall be continuously inspected. d. Visually inspect welds of heavy structural sections, or plates of 40mm minimum thickness, at least 72 hours after comple- tion of welding for the presence of cracks. e. Visually inspect areas where backing bars and welds tabs are removed for conformance with the surface roughness criteria of the specifications. f. Verify that the effective throat thickness of flare groove welds is consistently obtained when flush to bar or section. This ver- ification shall be based on test sections where necessary.
3. Nondestructive Testing Requirements: Testing Agency shall perform non-destructive testing of shop and field welding in accordance with the project specifications, governing building code, and AWS D1.1. Extent of non-destructive testing shall be as follows: a. Complete Joint Penetration (CJP) welds: UT 100% CJP welds greater than 8mm. MT 25% all CJP welds. b. Partial Penetration Joint (PPJ) welds: UT 100% of PJP welds greater than 8mm. UT 100% PJP in column splices. c. Fillet Welds: Fillet welds of gusset plates to beams, columns and base plates - MT 10% of the following fillet welds and re- duce to 5% if no significant cracks are found in the first 50 tested: a) gusset plate fillet welds to beam and columns; b) base plate fillet welds. d. Column Web Material at Continuity Plate: MT the WF column webs 3-inches above and below the weld termina- tions at the first 50 continuity plates and doubler plates in- stalled. Test shall be conducted when weld has cooled to ambient temperature. If no web cracks are found, then no more testing required. This test shall also be conducted for all locations where the Contractor has welded into the no weld zone shown on the Drawings for continuity plates. e. Access holes at splices in Heavy Structural Sections MT or PT 100%.
G. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear studs will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 and the governing building code for stud welding and as follows:
1. The type and capacity of the welding equipment shall be in accord- ance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be checked and approved.
2. At the beginning of each day's work, a minimum of 2 test stud welds shall be made, with the equipment to be used, to metal which is the same as the actual work piece. The test studs shall be subjected to a 90-degree bend test by striking them with a heavy hammer. After the above test, the weld section shall not exhibit any tearing or cracking.
3. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less- than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. King Abdullah Sports City
4. Tests will be conducted on additional shear studs if weld fracture occurs on shear studs already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry- bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, an- gles, and elevations.
B. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owners Representative in writing. Do not proceed with construction in the region of the discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been resolved.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and brac- ing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. The Schematic Design Drawings indicate the completed structure. The Contractor is fully responsible for all temporary measures nec- essary for erection, The Contractor must account for the effects of construction methodology and sequencing on the design.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and ac- cording to AISC 303 and AISC 360. Check accuracy after erection of each section.
B. Dimensions shown on drawings are based on an assumed design tem- perature of 70 degree F (28C). Fabrication and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the time of the respective operations.
C. Care shall be taken to protect work already installed from damages resulting from structural steel erection.
D. Items installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent distortion by pressure of concrete. Watch and maintain bracing during con- crete operations.
E. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting King Abdullah Sports City
plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. Remove any templates used for the setting of anchor bolts.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Pretension anchor rods after supported members have been posi- tioned and plumbed. If used, do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation in- structions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
F. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303.
G. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or struc- ture before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.
H. Splice members only where indicated.
I. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
J. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Where a hole is required to be enlarged by more than 2.5mm ream to and use next larger bolt size.
K. Shear Studs: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear studs. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear studs ac- cording to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Erection bolts for welded connection shall be tightened securely and left in place, unless noted otherwise.
B. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Speci- fication for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. King Abdullah Sports City
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or weld tabs back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
4. Weld in manner to prevent warping or distortion of finished product. Use jigs which will not restrain piece from moving during welding or cooling after welding. Sequence weld passes at a joint to prevent excessive heat build-up or cause shrinkage cracks to form.
5. Auxiliary Member Connections and Temporary Welds shall be per AWS provided that preheating may be omitted on ASTM A36 steel for single pass fillet welds with low hydrogen electrodes under the fol- lowing conditions: Air temperature is 60 F (15C). or over, steel is dry, and welds to structural base material are more than 1" (25.4mm)away from corners or ends of plates.
6. Preheat and post-heat procedures for welded joints shall be utilized to prevent rapid cooling of welds, particularly in cold weather. Pro- cedures are Contractors responsibility.
7. Where structural steel members are to remain exposed in the fin- ished work, welds exposed to view shall be uniformly made and ground smooth to the acceptance of the Company Representative. The acceptance criteria shall be tested and agreed using mock-ups of architecturally sensitive connections. The Company Representa- tive will specify the number and the location of mock-ups required.
D. Shear Studs: The shear studs shall be automatically end welded in ac- cordance with AWS D1.1 and the manufacturers recommendations in such a manner as to provide complete fusion between the end of the stud and the plate.
1. There should be no porosity or evidence of lack of fusion between the welded end of the stud and the plate.
2. Shear studs through metal deck shall be welded through the deck within 1 day of laying the deck.
E. Bearing Pads: Install bearing pads in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Erection Tolerances: Unless otherwise noted, level and plumb individual members of the structure within a tolerance of 1:500, but not to exceed 1/2" (12.7mm) for full height of columns. Make exterior columns and columns ad- jacent to elevator beams accurate within tolerance of 1:1000, but not to ex- ceed 1/2" (12.7mm) for full column height. Make level and plumb based on the mean operating temperature of the structure, allowing for the difference in temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature of the structure when completed and in service. Base measurements relating to tolerances on the theoretical centerline of the columns. King Abdullah Sports City
1. Columns: Gaps exceeding 1/8 inch (3mm) between milled ends not permitted. Shim acceptable gaps with non-tapered mild steel shim stock.
B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected accord- ing to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
1. The Inspector shall observe all Direct Tension Indicators to see if proper tightness is achieved.
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1, the governing building code, by the Testing Agency.
D. Defective Work:
1. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. Work deemed defec- tive will be removed from the site at the Contractors expense.
2. Any special tests not specifically covered by this specification that are proposed by the Contractor as a result of failure to comply with this Section shall be at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for any consequential costs or delays.
3. The results of those tests will be accepted, at the discretion of the Architect, as proof of adequate materials or workmanship.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Site connections including surfaces to be field welded, damage caused by or during transportation, handling, erection or any other cause should be pro- tected and/or made good as per the original specification including the origi- nal surface preparation. The Contractor can submit for approval proposals to the company representative for surface preparation in accordance with the following specifications and standards for areas limited to repair and site con- nections where the original shop surface preparation specification can be shown not to be achieved. Approval must be sought and granted prior to the works be executed on site: 1) SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning 2) SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780
C. Repair of Openings: For all members exposed to view in the final structure, close all lifting holes, access openings, etc. in such a manner that no visual evidence of the opening remains.
END OF SECTION 051200
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Multi-Purpose Sports Hall & Athletics Stadium
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup- plementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforce- ment, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1. Division 03 Section "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Review of submittals is of a general nature only, and the responsibility for conformance with intent of drawings shall remain with the Contractor. Re- view does not imply or state that the Contractor has correctly interpreted the construction documents. 2. All submissions shall be in accordance with the submission schedule developed and agreed between the Company Representative and Con- tractor at the commencement of the project. Submission shall include dates of order and delivery of materials to the shop and the site. 3. Shop drawing schedule shall allow adequate time for reviews. Reinforcing steel shall not be fabricated or placed before the shop drawings have been reviewed by the Company Representative and returned. 4. Product Data: Submit a. Complete description of proposed curing methods.
5. Shop Drawings: Submit complete Shop Drawings, including but not necessarily limited to: a. Reinforcing steel cutting, bending and placement schedule. b. Location of all openings, depressions, trenches, sleeves, inserts and other items affecting the reinforcement and placing of the concrete. King Abdullah Sports City
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including ICC-ES for mechanical couplers.
C. Design Mixtures: Two copies of each concrete mix design to be used on the project shall be submitted for review and approval to an Aramco approved Test- ing Agency and Company Representative prior to concrete being delivered to site by four weeks. Submit proposed mix designs for each class of concrete on the Mix Design submittal form included at the end of this specification. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. For each concrete mixture, the following information shall be included: where the mix is to be used, all materials and admixtures including their source and proportions in the mix; Water content, water-to-cement ratio, slump, and aggregate grading; whether the mixture is appropriate for pumping; and total chloride content. 2. Provide shrinkage test results for mixes with shrinkage criteria showing that mix meets performance criteria. The mix design number must match with the mix design number shown on the test data. 3. Indicate compressive strength and method used to determine strength. The compressive strength of the concrete shall be proportioned per ACI. Include all calculations and tests required by ACI 318 Section 5.3 and 5.4. Laboratory test data must be submitted along calculations that show with each mix design meets the strength requirement. Mix design number must match the mix design number shown on the test data. In- clude all test results or past history back up data specific as part of the submittal. Test results within the past two years shall be used to indicate performance in accordance with past history. 4. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
Each mix shall be stamped and signed by a registered design professional. 5. Indicate density of aggregate or equilibrium density, for lightweight concrete.
D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings in accordance with ACI SP 66 that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Direct copies of the con- tract documents are not acceptable as a submission from the Contractor.
1. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, me- chanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Include any welding to be done. 2. Shop drawings shall make it clear where each bar is located. Beams, grade beams and walls shall be shown in elevation. On elevations show locations of sleeves and penetrations. 3. Check architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical and other contract documents for anchor bolt schedules and locations, anchors, inserts, conduits, sleeves, and any other items which are required to be cast in concrete, and make necessary provisions as required so that re- inforcing steel will not interfere with the placement of such embedded items. 4. Show all areas of congestion. Identify where reinforcing steel will in- terfere with the placement of embedded items such as anchor bolts, anchors, inserts, conduits, sleeves and any other items which are re- quired to be cast in concrete. King Abdullah Sports City
E. Submit schedule of concrete placement operations before commencing Work.
F. Show on one or more plans and/or elevations, locations of construction, con- traction and expansion of joints, slab edges, curbs, equipment pads, depres- sions, sleeves and openings. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to position the construction joints and control the pour size so as not to cause any detri- mental impact on the permanent works.
G. Formwork: Prepared by or under the supervision of a registered design professional detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1. Design Criteria: a. Design of concrete formwork, shoring, reshoring and bracing shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall conform to Code requirements and shall be in accordance with the recom- mendations of ACI 347. b. Provide forms complete and of such strength and adequately braced so as to prevent any spreading, shifting or settling when concrete is placed to ensure finished concrete surfaces of the required tolerances. c. Forms shall be tight to prevent leakage or washing out of cement mortar from concrete. d. Bolts, rods, and other devices when used for internal ties and spreaders shall be of such construction that when the forms are removed, no metal shall be within 25.mm of the concrete surfaces.
2. Shop Drawing Requirements: a. Shop Drawings shall show location and layout of construction joints, reveals, slab edges, form joints, sleeves, openings, tex- tures, locations of tie holes or plugs, location of embedded items and blockouts, and all related details affecting Architectural quali- ty. b. Shop Drawings will show dimensioned location to the face of formwork for walls, beams, columns, slab edges, slab de- pressions, etc. c. Formwork details affecting Architectural finish quality shall be reviewed by the Company Representative. d. Indicate where formwork release agent will be used, as applicable. e. Where a mock-up is required, submit shop drawings of the mock- up.
H. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring. Show how forces will be transferred to the reshores. Show that procedures will not cause damage to the structure nor result in additional permanent deflections. Provide calculations by a registered design professional.
I. Welding certificates.
J. Welding Procedures for all reinforcement welding.
K. Mill Test Reports: Submit steel producer's certificates of mill analysis for each heat or melt of reinforcing steel, including steel source, description, heat num- ber, yield point, ultimate tensile strength, elongation percent, bend test and the chemical composition of each heat as determined by ladle analysis, before de- livery of steel to site. Where steel is required to be welded, mill reports shall be used to help verify the weldability of the steel. King Abdullah Sports City
L. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. Submit qualification of Concrete Foreman, showing 5 years experience with this type of concrete installation.
M. Material Test Reports: For the following, from an Aramco approved testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:
1. Normal weight aggregate (per ASTM C33). Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. Include evaluation of reactivity and the following: a. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C131; Los Angeles Machine. b. Cleanness Value: Test Method NO. C 227; coarse aggregate only. c. Fineness: ASTM C117. d. Organic Impurities: ASTM C40. e. Potential Reactivity: ASTM C289. f. Sand Equivalent: Test Method No. C 217. g. Sieve Analysis: ASTM C136. h. Soundness: ASTM C88.
N. Product Test Reports and Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials, per ASTM C150. 2. Admixtures. Where more than one admixture is used, include certifi- cation that admixtures are compatible. Per ASTM C494 for each type used; include chloride ion content. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Welding Electrodes 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Non-shrink grout, per ASTM C1107 Grade B. 10. Bonding agents. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Post-installed concrete anchors. 15. Repair materials.
O. Submit a complete description of the system proposed for meeting the floor slab flatwork tolerances. Submit survey data from a minimum of two previous slab in- stallations to demonstrate capability to satisfy specified tolerances.
P. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
Q. Submit an affidavit identifying cementitious material used, including manufactur- er's lot number, date of shipment by manufacturer, date of receipt by the con- crete supplier, place of storage and date of use. If such information is not available, a sample of cementitious material used on the Project shall be taken for each day's pour and shall be tested as directed by the Company Representative at no additional cost.
R. Transit-Mix Delivery Slips
1. Keep record at the Site showing time and place of each pour of concrete, together with transit mix delivery slip certifying contents of the pour per ASTM C94. Include the time water was added to dry mix. King Abdullah Sports City
2. Make the record available for inspection at the Site and to the Company Representative for his review upon request. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver the record and the delivery slips to the Company Representative.
S. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following:.
1. The 2009 International Building Code of the International Code Council (ICC) in its entirety, with all amendments and supplements thereto except where provisions of the IBC are specifically varied by the Saudi Building Code (SBC) unless advised otherwise by the Company Representative. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy weight, and Mass Concrete 4. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 5. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 6. ACI SP-66, Detailing Manual 7. ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 8. ASTM C94-09 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 9. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 10. ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 11. ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete 12. ASTM A767 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 13. ASTM C1240 Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures 14. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.4, Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel 15. ASTM C 595 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements 16. ASTM C 1602M Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 17. ASTM C 1157 Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement 18. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting 19. ACI 355.2 Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary 20. ACI 224 Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures 21. ACI 224.3R Joints in Concrete Construction 22. ACI 237R Self Consolidating Concrete 23. SAER Concrete Repair Manual 24. ACI 504R Guide to Joint Sealants in Concrete Structures
B. Installer Qualifications: Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. King Abdullah Sports City
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent approved agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as doc- umented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be carried out by certified special inspectors or approved agencies
E. Approved Testing Agency: The Contactor shall engage an independent ap- proved agency to perform tests and prepare test reports. The selection of the independent approved agency shall be subject to the approval of the Company Representative. The Company Representative may, at his discretion, call for tests tor inspections to be verified by separate approved agency.
F. Contractors Quality Control Plan: Quality Control includes the functions per- formed by the Contractor to ensure that the material and workmanship of con- crete construction meets the project specifications and applicable standards. The Contractor shall submit a Quality Control Plan that addresses all inspec- tion issues, including testing and inspection per ACI. The verification testing and inspection carried out by the approved Testing Agency does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for conducting their own quality con- trol/inspection program to ensure the requirements of the Contract Documents have been met. The Contractors Quality Control Plan shall be reviewed and approved by the Company Representative.
G. Quality Control Inspector Qualifications: Along with Quality Control Plan, Contractor shall submit written qualifications for all inspectors to be assigned Quality Control functions for concrete work.
H. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.
I. Mechanical Bar Couplers shall have a current ICC-ES Evaluation Report that indicates compliance with requirements of these specifications.
J. Unidentifiable Reinforcing Steel: Tested by an approved testing agency; under the responsibility of the Contractor:
1. Test reinforcing delivered to site which cannot be properly identified by heat number and mill mark for compliance with ASTM A615 as follows: 2. 25mm Bar and Smaller: One tensile test and one bend test of each size per 7-1/2 tonnes or portion thereof. 3. 32mm Bar and Larger: One tensile test of each size per 10 tonnes, or portion thereof.
K. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
1. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before performing further welding. 2. Firm specializing in furnishing and installing reinforcement shall have a minimum of 5 years experience on projects with requirements similar to this project and shall have sufficient production capacity. 3. All welding shall be performed by operators who are qualified for the types of welds used. Each operator shall have been qualified within the preceding one year as prescribed by AWS. Welder qualification shall include passing the Charpy tests when specified for the electrode. 4. Require welders to retake the qualification test at no additional cost if, as determined by the Company Representative, there is a reasonable doubt King Abdullah Sports City
as to the proficiency of the welder. If the welder does not requalify, they shall not perform any welding on the project.
L. Concrete Testing Service: Engage an independent approved testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to test concrete mixtures. When mixes, are proportioned by trial batch method, engage a Laboratory conforming to ASTM E329 and under direction of a registered design professional.
M. Prefabrication and Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place con- crete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent approved testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor.
2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot- weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contrac- tion and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor- retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation toler- ances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and level- ness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and re- placements necessary to the approval of the Company Representative and at no additional cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
B. Steel Reinforcement:
1. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. Manufacture, fabrication, handling, placement and storage of reinforcement shall be in accordance with chapter 7 of ACI 318. Handling and fabrication of the Epoxy coated reinforcement shall be in accordance with ASTM A775 Appendix, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI). The extent of the damage and repair of the coating shall be in accordance with 09- SAMSS-106. 2. Deliver reinforcing to Site properly bundled, tagged and marked with mill identification for cross referencing the mill certificates. Use tags that in- dicate bar size, lengths and marks corresponding to markings shown on shop drawings. Segregate so as to maintain identification after bundles are broken. 3. Store reinforcement in a manner that will prevent excessive rusting or fouling with/ grease, oil, dirt, and other bond weakening materials. 4. Do not use damaged, reworked, or deteriorated material.
C. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. King Abdullah Sports City
D. Formwork: Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.
E. Concrete Materials:
1. Protect cement from moisture and rotate stock to ensure fresh materials. 2. Protect aggregates as necessary to maintain saturated condition when batched. 3. Storage methods should comply with ACI 301 4.1.4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. The Contractor may propose alternatives with equivalent quality and performance to products specified and may use such products, subject to approval by Company Representative. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide con- tinuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other agreed panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; and edge sealed. Mill oil not allowed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another ap- proved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. For exposed surfaces not otherwise specified use Special exterior Type Doug- las Fir, Grade AB plywood, conforming to NBS PS-1, minimum 19 mm. thick and constructed so that finished concrete will be straight, smooth, dense, free from honeycombs, bulges, or depressions. Keep joints between plywood sec- tions to a minimum and make tight and strongly backed so that adjoining edg- es remain flush and true. King Abdullah Sports City
D. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber- re- inforced plastic that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. For areas ex- posed to view, use new forms or specially selected forms.
F. Foam Filler or High Density Styrofoam Fill: Expanded polystyrene foam, ASTM C578, Type IX, 1.9 pounds per cubic foot density. G. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 20mm x 20mm, minimum. H. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
I. Form Gaskets (for sealing form panel joints) Gaskets shall be closed cell, com- pletely skinned, foam rubber or neoprene, with pressure sensitive paperbacked adhesive on surfaces to be bonded to forms. Gaskets shall be of sufficient thickness, widths and compressibility for specific use.
J. Form Sealer (Wood Forms): All form sealers shall be of a type which will not harmfully affect the appearance and/or utility of the concrete surface or the application of sealers, paint, vinyl fabric or any other finishes. In addition, form sealer shall prevent the development of bond or adhesion to concrete.
K. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair sub- sequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 2. Form release agents shall have a VOC content of 350 grams/liter or less.
L. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber- rein- forced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 25mm to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 25mm in diameter in concrete surface and permit neat and solid patching at every hole. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.
1. ASTM A615, Grade 60, hot rolled high tensile, deformed, unless noted otherwise conforming to SASO SSA2. 2. ASTM A706M, Grade 60, hot rolled, high tensile, deformed steel, where bars are welded.
Note : In terms of purchase on the situation , ASTM A615, Grade 60, hot rolled high tensile, deformed bar could be substituted with equivalent grade, It should be confirmed by the contractor in compliance with Ar- amco standard.
B. For Wall Boundary Elements: Comply with low alloy steel, ASTM A706, Grade 60. Billet steel A615 Grade 60 complying with IBC Section 1908.1.5 may be used in lieu of A706.
C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars, ASTM A775, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 300mm bar length, conforming to 09-SAMSS-106 Fusion Bonded Epoxy. D. Headed Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A970. E. Stainless-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A955, Grade 60, Type, deformed.
F. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars, assembled with clips.
G. Tie Wire: American Wire 16 gauge or heavier black annealed wire.
H. Spiral Reinforcement: Use Plain-Steel Wire if specified as wire or ASTM A615 Grade 60 if specified by bar size.
I. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A82, as drawn. J. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A496. K. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A884, Class A, Type 1 coated, as-drawn, plain steel wire, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 300mm wire length.
L. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
M. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A497, flat sheet.
N. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185, plain, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.
O. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A884, Class A coated, Type 1, deformed steel.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, King Abdullah Sports City
C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A775.
D. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed zinc.
E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, support- ing, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view or where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports, unless noted otherwise. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric- polymer-coated wire bar supports. 3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer- coated wire bar supports. 4. Where supports are placed against ground or atop vapor barrier use of PVC Schedule 80 pipe as spacer is permitted. PVC pipe shall be notched at the bottom to allow the ingress of concrete. 5. At Architectural Concrete and surfaces exposed to weather; CRSI Class 1 plastic protected. 6. ISO approved fiber reinforced cement.
F. Mechanical Bar Couplers: Provide coupler capable of achieving Type 1- splice, unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
1. Type 1: ICC-ES approved; capable of developing 125% of specified minimum yield strength of bar in tension or compression. 2. Type 2: ICC-ES approved; capable of developing the lesser of 95% of the ultimate tensile strength or 160% of the specified minimum yield strength of the bar in tension or compression.
G. Welding Electrodes: As required in AWS D1.4. As a minimum, use E90XX electrodes.
H. Deformed Bar Anchors: Nelson, flux filled deformed bar anchors, type D2L, as manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding Division of TRW or approved equal.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with ACI 301, 315 or CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Bending: 1. Do not bend or kink reinforcing except as shown on the Drawings. 2. Minimum bend diameters and hook extensions as shown on the drawings or per ACI. 3. In case of fabrication errors do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material. 4. Reinforcing bars are to be bent cold, do not preheat, unless approved by Company Representative. 5. Do not rebend reinforcement that has previously been bent within 150mm of new bend except as allowed in section 3.3.2.8 of ACI 301. King Abdullah Sports City
C. Spirals: Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 finishing turns top and bottom. D. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects shall not be permitted in the Work and will be replaced without cost:
1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances. 2. Bend or kinks not shown on the Drawings or final shop drawings. 3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to rusting or other cause. 4. Bars with dirt, mud, grease or form release agent.
2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: a. ASTM C150, Type I, unless noted otherwise b. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type V.
2. Supplement Portland Cement with the following Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM):
a. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, amorphous silica.
3. Cementitious material used shall have at least 2 years of use with proposed aggregates without detrimental reaction. 4. Alkali content shall not exceed 0.6% when tested in accordance with ASTM C114. 5. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 65C
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, Class 3S for aggregate in concrete exposed to weather, Class 3N for aggregate in concrete protected from weather, coarse aggregate or better, graded. All aggregates shall conform to 09SAMSS 088. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applica- tions and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious mate- rials].
1. Coarse Aggregate: a. Maximum Size: 25mm nominal, unless noted otherwise. b. Minimum Specific Gravity: 2.65. c. Aggregate shall contain no thin or elongated pieces. Any piece having a major dimension more than 2-1/2 times the average thickness shall be considered thin or elongated. d. If shrinkage controlled concrete, Coarse Aggregate shall be crushed limestone, granite, or accepted equal. e. The maximum size used in a particular location shall be consistent with the form and dimensions of the section being placed, with the location and spacing of the reinforcing steel and with the method of vibration. The aggregate sizes shall be such as will produce dense, uniform concrete, free of rock pockets, honeycombs, or other irregularities. f. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated concrete shall be 8% to 18% for large top size aggregates 25mm 38mm) or 8% - 22% for smaller top size aggregates (25mm 19mm) retained on each sieve below the top size and above the No. 100.
2. Fine Aggregate: Uniformly graded, clean sand, free from excessive King Abdullah Sports City
fines, organic materials or other deleterious materials. Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C94 including the optional chemical tests, clean, free from deleterious matter and potable. Water shall also meet the requirements of ASTM C 1602M Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
2.7 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Only if accepted by the Company Representative in accordance with ACI 318/318R 3.6 if the admixtures comply with requirements of ASTM C494. Where more than one is used, admixtures shall be compatible. Use of admix- tures shall be consistent throughout Work.
1. Where specified herein do not use other admixtures without the written acceptance of the Company Representative. 2. Prohibited Admixtures: Admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions, fluorides, sulphites, thiocyanates, and/or nitrates are not permitted. Do not use admixtures that will negatively impact the visual finish of concrete exposed to view.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type B. 2. High-Range, Water-Reducing (Superplasticizers) Admixture: ASTM C494, Type F. Products: a. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; "WRDA 19 or Daracem 100" b. Sika Corporation; "Sikament 300" c. BASF Construction Products; Rheobuild 1000 d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucon 37, 1037 or Plastol 5000
3. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type G. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017, Type II. 5. Shrinkage reducing admixtures: Not yet covered by ASTM 6. Viscosity modifying admixtures for self-compacting concrete: ASTM C494 type S. 7. Non-Chloride, Non-Corrosive Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type C or E. Manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory (of at least a years duration) using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method. Products: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80, 90, or NCA
C. Color Pigment: ASTM C979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored wa- ter-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
1. Manufacturers: a. Bayer Corporation. b. ChemMasters. c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; a Dayton Superior Company. d. Davis Colors. e. Elementis Pigments, Inc. f. Hoover Color Corporation. g. Lambert Corporation. King Abdullah Sports City
2. Color: As selected by Company Representative from manufacturer's full range.
2.8 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513,for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricated corners, inter- sections, and directional changes.
1. Manufacturers: a. Greenstreak. b. Progress Unlimited, Inc. c. Williams Products, Inc. d. Fosroc e. Adeka f. Grace
2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb [Flat, dumbbell without center bulb] [Ribbed with center bulb] [Ribbed without center bulb]. 3. Dimensions: 4 inches (101.6mm) by 3/16 inch (4.8mm) thick ; 100mm by 5mm nontapered.
B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete 20mm by 25mm.
1. [Available ] Products: a. Colloid Environmental Technologies Company; Volclay Waterstop- RX. b. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231. c. Greenstreak; Swellstop. d. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. e. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earthshield Type 20. f. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Superstop. g. TCMiraDRI; Mirastop. h. Grace Adcor ES
2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 10 mils (0.25mm) thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure- sensi- tive tape. Plastic Vapor Retarder shall have a water-vapor transmission rate no greater than .012 perms (grain/h xft2 in x Hg) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96.
1. [Available ]Products: a. Alumiseal Corporation; Zero Perm Vapor Barrier. b. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra A. c. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block [15] [10]. d. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-[65G] [105]. e. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Plasmatic Core. f. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils (0.38mm).
B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38.1mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. King Abdullah Sports City
C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed grav- el, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious sub- stance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
2.10 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (0.305 kg/m) when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film, fiber reinforced asphaltic vapor barrier building paper, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
1. Provide in a thickness of 42 mils (1.07mm); standard weight of 53 lbs./1000 ft2 (26kg/m); tensile strength (machine direction) of 36 lbs./in (6.3N/m).; and puncture resistance of 70 lbs (3.12N)
D. Water: Potable.
E. Curing compounds shall have a VOC limit of 200 g/l.
F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. Sodium silicate compounds are prohibited.
G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating[, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering]. Sodium silicate compounds are prohibited.
H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating[, certified by curing com- pound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering]. Sodium sili- cate compounds are prohibited.
I. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. Sodium silicate compounds are prohibited.
J. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. Sodium silicate compounds are prohibited.
2.11 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork or ASTM D1752, gray sponge rubber.
B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. King Abdullah Sports City
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
E. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors All post installed anchor bolts shall satisfy ACI- 318 appendix D. All post installed anchors shall be qualified in accordance with ACI 355.2 Qualification of Post Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary. All anchors shall be installed by an approved vendor contractor.
F. Expansion Anchors: Kwik Bolt III by Hilti Inc, Trubolt Wedge by ITW Ramset/Red Head, Power-Stud by Powers-Rawl, or approved equal.
1. Epoxy Dowels / Epoxy Anchors: HIT HY 150 by Hilti, Inc., CIA-Gel 7000 by Covert Operations, SET by Simpson Strong Tie, Power-Fast by Powers-Rawl, or equal. 2. Grouted Dowels / Grouted Anchors: High strength non-shrink grout to anchor reinforcing steel or threaded rods in concrete shall be Masterflow 928 grout as manufactured by Master Builders, Sika Grout 212 as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or equal. 3.
F. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 26 gauge, galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. Galvanized material is only suitable for internal controlled environ- ments.
G. Joint Fillers. Use joint fillers appropriate for coastal environments.
H. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 22 gauge, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. Galvanized material is only suitable for internal controlled environments.
2.12 MORTARS AND GROUTS
A. Bonding Grout: Approximately 1 part Portland cement to 1 part fine sand pass- ing a no 30 sieve and a 50/50 mixture of approved bonding admixture and wa- ter, mixed to a consistency of thick paint and not exceeding the w/cm of the concrete to be bonded.
B. Patching Mortar for exposed concrete shall be made of the same material and of approximately the same proportions as used for concrete, except that coarse aggregate shall be omitted and mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts damp loose sand by volume.
1. Combine white and gray Portland cement as necessary to match color specified by Architect. Use no more mixing water than necessary for handling and placing. 2. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand with frequent mixing with trowel without adding water until it has reached the stiffest con- sistency that will permit placing.
C. High Flow Grout:
1. Where high fluidity and/or increased placing time is required, use high flow low viscosity grout. King Abdullah Sports City
2. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Non-Shrink). 3. When placed at a fluid consistency there shall be at least 95% bearing under an 450mm by 900mm base plate. 4. Hi-Flow Grout manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company or Masterflow 928 manufactured by BASF Construction Products.
D. Epoxy grout for anchor reinforcing steel or threaded rods in concrete shall be Masterflow MP as manufactured by BASF Construction Products, or Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or Epoxy 452 or E3G by Euclid Chemical Company.
E. Cementitious grout for anchor reinforcing steel or threaded rods in concrete shall be Masterflow 928 grout as manufactured by BASF Construction Products or Sika Grout 212 as manufactured by Sika Corporation, Hi-Flow grout by Euclid Chemical Company.
F. Drypack Mortar for Form Holes at Non-Architectural Grade Surfaces: Com- posed of 1 part Portland cement and 2 parts of fine aggregate and water. Match color of adjacent surfaces.
2.13 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. High Strength Flowing Repair Mortar: For forming and pouring structural members, or large horizontal repairs, provide the flowable one-part, high strength microsilica modified repair mortar with 10mm aggregate. The product shall achieve 9000 psi @ 28-days at a 225mm slump.
B. Concrete Patching Mortar:
1. Horizontal repairs, ASTM C1059, Type II. [Available] Products: a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Euco Thin Coat, Concrete Coat b. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikatop 121 or 122
2. Vertical or Overhead repairs, ASTM C1059, Type II. [Available] Products: a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Verticoat b. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikatop 123 c. Master Builders; Emaco R300, 310 or R350
C. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 3mm and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3mm to 6mm or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 35MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109. 5. Bond Strength: Not less than 7MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C1042. 6. [Available] Products: a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Flo-Top b. Master Builders; UnderLayment 110 King Abdullah Sports City
D. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 3mm and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, Portland Cement Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 2. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3mm to 6mm or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 35MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109. 4. Products: a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Thin Top SL b. Master Builders; Topping 112
5. Product shall exhibit the following properties: Chaplin Abrasion Test 0.0079-inches (0.2mm) maximum at 28 days.
2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Procurement of concrete mix design is responsibility of Contractor. 2. Use a qualified independent approved agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy- use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.45.
D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manu- facturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color con- sistent with agreed mockup.
E. Prepare design mixtures for large sections (greater than 0.5m minimum dimen- sion)to ensure that temperature during hydration doeas not exceed 650C. A higher temperature may be accepted subject to approval where it is demon- strated that the risk of delayed eteringite formation is not increased because of the choice of cementitious materials.
2.15 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Definition of Mix Properties:
1. Concrete strength (f'c) is the minimum compressive strength at 28 days unless specified otherwise, tested in accordance with ASTM C39. 2. Aggregate size is the largest of the coarse aggregate. King Abdullah Sports City
3. Slump shall be measured at the point of delivery in accordance with ASTM C143 prior to the addition of superplasticizer (if used). Slump tol- erance shall meet the requirements of ACI 117. Slump can be increased with use of a superplasticizer to improve workability of mix. After addition of superplasticizer, slump shall not exceed 8 (203.2mm) at point of deliv- ery. 4. Air content is by volume and may be plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery. 5. Water/cement ratio is specified by weight. 6. Drying shrinkage limit is percentage change in length after 21 days of drying when tested as per ASTM C157 with 4 inches (101.6mm) x 4 inches (101.6mm) x 11 inches (279.4mm) specimen moist cured 7 days prior to drying.
B. Foundations Pad Footings and Rafts: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 35MPa has been used for SD. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 3. SCM Replacement ratio: 10 percent (Silica Fume). 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 38mm 5. Slump Limit: 4 inches (101.6mm) maximum with water reducing admixture or 8 inches (203.2mm) with high range water reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm). 6. Air Content: 2percent +/- 1.5 percent. 7. Shrinkage Limit: .045 percent. 8. Type I cement plus Silica Fume for all foundations with formation level within natural ground level..
C. Grade Beams, Basement Slab, Slab on Grade, Retaining Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 35MPa has been used for SD. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 3. SCM Replacement ratio: 10 percent (Silica Fume). 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 25mm. 5. Slump Limit: 4 inches (101.6mm) [5 inches] maximum with water reducing admixture or 8 inches (203.2mm) with high range water reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm). 6. Air Content: 2 percent +/- 1.5 percent. 7. Shrinkage Limit: .045 percent. 8. Type 1 cement plus Silica Fume for all beams with formation level below natural ground level.
D. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 35MPa has been used for SD. 2. Minimum 7-day Compressive Strength (fc) : 25MPa has been used for SD. 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 4. Maximum Aggregate Size : 25mm 5. Slump Limit: 4 inches (101.6mm) [5 inches] maximum with water reducing admixture or 8 inches (203.2mm) with high range water reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm). 6. Air Content 2 percent +/- 1.5 percent. 7. Shrinkage Limit: .045 percent.] King Abdullah Sports City
E. Walls & Columns: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 40MPa has been used for SD. 2. Minimum 7-day Compressive Strength (fc) : 28MPa has been used for SD. 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 4. SCM Replacement ratio: 10 percent. (Silica Fume) 5. Maximum Aggregate Size : 25mm. 6. Slump Limit: 4 inches (101.6mm) [5 inches] maximum with water reducing admixture or 8 inches (203.2mm) with high range water reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm). 7. Shrinkage Limit: .045 percent. 8. Type 1 cement plus Silica Fume for all parts constructed below natural ground level. .
F. Normal Weight Concrete Fill in Decking: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 28MPa. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.4 3. Maximum Aggregate Size: 25mm. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches (101.6mm) [5 inches] maximum with water reducing admixture or 8 inches (203.2mm) with high range water reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm) . 5. Air Content: 2 percent +/- 1.5 percent. 6. Shrinkage Limit: .045 percent. 7.
G. Topping On Precast Units: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 35MPa has been used for SD. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.4. 3. Maximum Aggregate Size: 25mm 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches (101.6mm) [5 inches] maximum with water reducing admixture or 8 inches (203.2mm) with high range water reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm) . 5. Air Content: 2 percent +/-1.5 percent. 6. Shrinkage Limit: .045 percent.
H. Fill Below Foundations, Blinding: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 20MPa. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.5. Type V cement where below natural ground level or in contact with selected fill.
I. Self-Consolidating Concrete: Use for architectural concrete and heavily re- inforced members where appropriate to achieve finish and/or necessary consolidation.
1. Target slump/flow: 600mm to 750mm. 2. The target slump/flow shall be determined by a successful test placement onsite. The test placement shall verify proper slump/flow, workability, pumpability, finish and setting time. King Abdullah Sports City
3. All self-consolidating concrete shall contain the specified high-range water-reducing admixture and viscosity-enhancing admixture as required. 4. To comply with ACI 237R-07 Self Consolidating Concrete.
2.16 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.17 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. The batching plant shall be equipped with an electric metering device capable of determining moisture content of sand. 2. Begin the mixing operation within thirty minutes after the cement has been intermingled with the aggregates. 3. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30C and 32.C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. At least one month prior to commencement of concrete work, meet at the Project site to review methods and sequence of concrete construction, standard of workmanship, material selection, testing and quality control requirements, de- tailed requirements of the design mixes, placement procedures, off-site batching requirements, coordination of the work with other trades and other pertinent top- ics related to the Work. The meeting shall include the following:
1. Company Representatives 2. Construction Manager/General Contractor 3. Concrete Subcontractor 4. Owners Testing Laboratory 5. Ready Mix Concrete Supplier 6. Admixture Manufacturer Representative 7. Formwork Manufacturer/Supplier 8. Lightweight Aggregate Supplier 9. Any other subcontractor and/or material supplier including plumbing, waterproofing and electrical supplier or manufacturer required
B. The minutes shall include a statement by the concrete contractor indicating that the proposed mix design and placing techniques shall produce the concrete quality required by these specifications.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected.
B. Prior to Work specified in this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that such Work is complete to the point where this in- stallation may properly commence. King Abdullah Sports City
C. Verify that forms may be constructed in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations, the referenced standards, and the design documents.
1. Ensure Excavations are sufficient to permit placement, inspection, and removal of forms. 2. Verify reinforcing steel has been inspected prior to concealing with formwork. 3. Verify geotechnical engineer has approved all foundation excavations. D. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions prior to starting construction. E. Coordinate:
1. Obtain necessary information for coordination of formwork with items to be embedded in concrete. 2. Coordinate size and location of openings in concrete. Obtain Company Representative approval for openings not shown on Structural Drawings. F. Discrepancies: 1. Notify the Company Representative of any discrepancies or inconsistencies. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.3 FORMWORK
A. Mock-up: When a mock-up of the concrete is required, do not construct forms for concrete, other than for mock-up, until mock-up has been accepted.
B. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 347 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads and such that formwork can withstand excessive deflection when filled with wet concrete.
C. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, camber and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. Make proper provision for all openings, offsets, recesses, anchorage, blocking, and other features of the Work as shown or required. Provide open- ings as required for vibrators and concrete placing and for venting of displaced air.
D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 3mm for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 6mm for rough-formed finished surfaces.
E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Tape all joints at forms for sandblasted finished concrete, including joints between plywood and trim strips.
F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 hor- izontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. King Abdullah Sports City
G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and se- cure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting- type screeds.
H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate tempo- rary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufac- turer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in- place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.
3.4 EARTH FORMS
A. Earth Forms:
1. Where sides are unstable or excavations are not accurately cut to tol- erances of ACI 301, construct formwork to the extent required, at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms; remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete. 3. Form footings to minimum extent shown on Drawings.
3.5 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Ensure that embedded items are placed and held, during placing of concrete, to tolerances consistent with other items that will be attached to them. All embedded items within 25mmof the surface of concrete that is not within a controlled internal environments shall be of stainless steel or other suitable corrosion resistant material
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flash- ings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures. 4. Install concrete accessories in accordance with manufacturers recommendations: straight, level, and plumb. King Abdullah Sports City
B. Provide pipe sleeves when pipes pass through concrete. Fill voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete into voids.
C. Coring of concrete after placement is not permitted without prior approval by the Company Representative.
D. Conduits, pipes and other items made from aluminium shall not be embedded in structural concrete unless effectively coated to prevent aluminium-concrete reaction.
3.6 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumula- tively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural ele- ments that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its specified design compressive strength, fc. Where a minimum 7-day strength has been specified, formwork may be removed when the 7-day strength as been achieved. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. 3. When forms are removed in less than 7 days, curing shall be continued as follows: a. Loosen form ties and run water down inside of form to keep concrete wet. b. Immediately following form removal, thoroughly wet surface. c. Continue curing as specified elsewhere in this specification. d. Where mixture utilizes fly ash curing time shall be a minimum of 14 days
B. Remove forms carefully to avoid damaging corners and edges of exposed concrete. Prying against the face of concrete shall not be allowed.
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, de- laminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless agreed by Company Representa- tive.
E. Re-use of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule for placement of concrete from the schedule obtained if all of the forms were new.
F. All forms below ground surface, along with all shores and braces, shall be removed before backfilling.
3.7 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. King Abdullah Sports City
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.8 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Lap joints 150mm and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.9 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Wherever embedded items interfere with placing of reinforcement notify the Company Representative and obtain approval before placing any concrete. Do not bend or field cut bars around openings or sleeves. 2. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. Where there is a potential of rust staining adjacent finish surfaces, take necessary steps to prevent staining.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement, particularly under the weight of workmen and the placement of concrete. Use bar supports in sufficient number, size and location to prevent vertical dis- placement of the reinforcement and gouging of the formwork. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Do not exceed the tolerances specified in ACI 117. 2. Reinforcement shall be held in place by means of supports adequate to prevent displacement and to maintain reinforcement at proper distance from form face. The use of wood supports and spacers inside the forms is not permitted. 3. Dowels shall be tied securely in place before concrete is deposited. In the event there are no bars in position to which a dowel may be tied, No 3 bars (minimum) shall be added to provide proper support and anchorage. 4. Do not place reinforcement in floor slabs or beams until concrete has been placed in columns and walls, except where bars extend down into columns or walls. 5. Use templates for placement of column dowels. 6. Where Drawings do not show the spacing of the reinforcing, the minimum clear spacing shall conform to ACI 318 Section 7.6. 7. Reinforcing partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as accepted by Company Representative. King Abdullah Sports City
8. Wherever conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves, etc., interfere with placing of reinforcing steel, obtain acceptance of method of procedure before any concrete is placed. Bending of bars around openings or sleeves not permitted. 9. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, only where indicated on drawings. Welding is not permitted on bars where the carbon equivalent is unknown. Do not weld within 2 bar diameters of where bars have been bent cold. Welding material, wire cuttings and tramp metal shall be thor- oughly cleaned from forms for exposed concrete before any concrete is placed.
D. Splicing: Make splices only at those locations shown on the Drawings or as accepted by the Company Representative. Splice locations not shown on the Drawings shall be approved in shop drawings before fabrication. Stagger splices in adjacent bars wherever possible.
E. Reinforcing shall be rigidly and securely tied with steel tie wire. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
F. If allowed, field bending or straightening shall be in accordance with section 3.3.2.8 of ACI 301.
G. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing plus 2 inches 50mm or 6 inches 150mm, whichever is great- er. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either di- rection. Lace overlaps with wire.
H. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D3963. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.
I. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material according to ASTM A780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement.
J. Install deformed bar anchors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
K. Install mechanical splices and reinforcing couplers in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
L. Minimum concrete cover for outer most rebar shall be provided for reinforcement of cast-in-place concrete structures per SAES-Q-001
Concrete Structure Minimum Cover mm / in Concrete cast against or permanently exposed to earth (including foundations over a sub-slab) 75 / 3 Formed concrete exposed to earth or weather Supporting Process Equipment Buildings, walkway platforms, stairs, AC pads
75 / 3 50 / 2 Concrete not exposed to weather nor in contact with ground (which can be inspected from all sides): Beams, columns Slabs, walls, joists
50 / 2 25 / 1 Concrete exposed to sea water, raw water or sewage 75 / 3 King Abdullah Sports City
Between reinforcement and anchor flange/pipe within pipeline anchor blocks 100 / 4 Concrete slab over 50 mm sub-slab 50 / 2 Sidewalks, walkways, etc. 50 / 2
3.10 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Joints not specified on the design drawings shall be in accordance with ACE 301.
B. Existing Concrete to New Concrete Joints
1. Chip keys and roughen existing concrete surfaces where new concrete abuts. Roughen surface by bushhammering, chipping or sandblasting to remove surface mortar and expose clean aggregate. 2. Drill and install dowels using epoxy grout in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. 3. Prime surface with 10-mil (0.25mm) layer of epoxy adhesive using a stiff brush. Place concrete while the epoxy adhesive is still tacky. Re-prime if necessary.
C. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as accepted by Company Representative.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforce- ment across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not con- tinue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. In walls: do not space construction joints more than 60 feet (18.3m) apart in horizontal direction, maximum 20 feet (6.1m) apart in vertical direction unless otherwise shown. In framed slabs and beams, and on metal deck slabs, do not space construction joints more than 120 feet (36.6m) apart. In slabs on grade, do not space construction joints more than maximum 60 feet (18.2m) in any direction. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as otherwise shown. 3. Form keyed joints at indicated locations. Embed keys at least 35mm into concrete. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 6. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 7. Roughen surface at all construction joints where key is not used and un- der baseplates. Roughen concrete surface while concrete is still green where possible. Do not leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at surface. Forms and reinforcing shall be cleaned of drippings. Dampen contact surfaces of construction joints, leaving them free of standing water, before placing fresh concrete. 8. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. King Abdullah Sports City
D. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 3mm. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3mm wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 10mm or more than 25mm below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
F. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.11 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with ACI 301.
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other lo- cations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. Comply with ACI 301.
3.12 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been per- formed. Ensure that all foreign material has been removed from surfaces, in- cluding reinforcement and embedded items, against which concrete will be placed.
B. The addition of water at the site is contingent upon full time inspection of the process by the owners testing laboratory and the acceptance of the Inspector. Comply with ACI 301, section 4.3.2.1.
C. Method: Convey concrete as rapidly and directly as practicable to preserve quality and to prevent segregation. King Abdullah Sports City
1. Do not deposit concrete that has initially set. Retempering of concrete, which has partially set, is not permitted. 2. Maximum time for discharge of concrete shall be per ASTM C94.
D. Sequence: Pour all walls and columns full height to designated construction joints. Pour all beams, and horizontal structures to designated construction joints. Con- struction joints to be made in walls only where indicated on the Drawings.
E. Placement: Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Concrete shall not be placed prior to a recorded pre-placement in- spection, approval and authorization to proceed by Company Repre- sentative. 2. Equipment made of aluminum alloys shall not be used for pump lines, trem- ies, or chutes used to discharge concrete from a truck mixer. 3. When placing is once started, carry it on as a continuous operation until placement of the panel or section is complete. Construction joints to be made only where indicated on the Drawings or on approved shop drawings. Pre- vent the formation of cold joints at other locations. 4. Deposit concrete in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. Deposit concrete in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 5. Particular care shall be used when starting a concrete pour to maintain the continuity of appearance. Use all means necessary to avoid blemishes, im- perfections, or changes in the finish. 6. Raking shall not be used for movement of concrete after placement. 7. Concrete shall be deposited as near as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. 8. Retempering of concrete is prohibited after it has set to the extent that it can- not be readily worked with a vibrator. 9. Concrete shall not be dropped freely where reinforcing will cause seg- regation nor shall it be dropped freely more than 1016 mm. 10. Concrete shall be placed on a clean surface. Standing water shall be re- moved prior to placement of concrete. 11. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
F. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thor- oughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. Use and type of vibrator shall conform to ACI 309, Guide for Consol- idation of Concrete. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 150mm into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. Place vibrating ele- ment directly in concrete and not attached to either inside or outside of forms or to reinforcing steel. 3. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
G. Initial Finishing: 1. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct ele- vations. 2. Where floor drains or floor slopes are indicated, slope slabs uniformly to pro- vide even fall for drainage. King Abdullah Sports City
3. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open- textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
H. Fill Over Steel Deck:
1. At floor slabs, increase fill thickness as required to compensate for deflection of beams and deck at no additional cost to Owner. Maintain specified thickness of concrete uniformly along supporting beams. Obtain specified fill thickness at high, points of the deck. Finish floor to specified tolerances for floor flatness and levelness, including at suspended fill on steel deck floors
I. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. When concrete is expected to be placed at air temperatures of greater than 80 deg F (26.7C), contractor shall review with Company Representative all spe- cial procedures that will be used including mix design modifications and meth- ods of protection. This review shall occur prior to the expected extreme tem- peratures. 2. Provide sufficient protection material and equipment on the Project site in ad- vance of the time when the mean daily temperatures are expected to rise above 80 degrees F (26.7C) . 3. When air temperature exceeds 80 deg F (26.7C), take special precautions to prevent slump loss, rapid setting, and plastic shrinkage; including but not limited to: a. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32.2C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Con- tractor's option. b. Use set retarding admixture in accordance with previously ac- cepted submittals. c. Convey, deposit, finish and commence curing of concrete as rap- idly as practicable.
4. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing con- crete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
J. Do not adjust concrete with any procedure, which will cause segregation.
K. Screed concrete, which is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid excessive skimming and grouting.
L. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign mate- rials.
M. Remove rejected concrete from the site and dispose of it in a location approved by the Company Representative for that purpose. 3.13 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projec- tions exceeding 6mm
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing materi- al, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. King Abdullah Sports City
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a con- sistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part port- land cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bond- ing admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar un- formed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.14 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and fin- ishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screed- ed and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 6mm in 1 direction.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate con- crete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15. These values apply to all floors and slabs unless noted otherwise. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17. These values apply to slabs-on-grade
2. Slabs supporting modular office partitions, adhered flooring systems, or com- pact storage shelving must also comply with the manufacturers tolerance re- King Abdullah Sports City
quirements. 3. Slabs scheduled to receive wood flooring must also comply with tolerances required for installation of wood flooring. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 6mm. 4. Fill or grind completed floors as necessary to achieve specified finish toler- ances. Fill shall be with a self-leveling cementitious product capable of being tapered to a feathered edge. a. Repair any floor section measuring below either the minimum local F-number or the minimum local L-number.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify sur- face with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor sur- faces.
F. Broom Finish: Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate re- quired final finish with Architect before application.
G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft.(1.22kg/m) of dampened slip-resistive ag- gregate over surface in 1 or 2 applications. Tamp aggregate flush with sur- face, but do not force below surface. 2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose slip-resistive
H. Schedule of Concrete Finish Types, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1. Formed Surfaces Not Exposed To View: Rough Formed. 2. Formed Surfaces Exposed To View At Building Interior: Smooth Formed. 3. Formed Surfaces Exposed To View At Building Exterior: Smooth Formed. 4. Formed Surfaces to Receive: a. Paint: Grout Cleaned. b. Waterproofing, Dampproofing: Smooth Formed. c. Veneer Plaster: Smooth Formed.
5. Exposed Interior Slabs: Trowel. 6. Exposed Stair Fills and Ramps: Nonslip Aggregate. 7. Slabs to Receive: a. Concrete Toppings: Float. b. Mortar Setting Beds: Scratch. c. Membrane Waterproofing: Float. d. Fluid Applied Waterproofing: Trowel. e. Resilient Flooring: Trowel. f. Carpet: Trowel. g. Tile (thin-set): Fine Broom.
8. Exposed to View Curbs: Provide monolithic finish by stripping forms while concrete is green and steel-troweling surfaces to a dense, hard, finish with corners intersections and terminations slightly rounded.
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indi- cated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as speci- fied, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equip- ment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufac- turer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and as- sociated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.
E. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors
1. Install in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and ICC- ES reports. 2. Use washers on all bolts. 3. Use care to avoid cutting or damaging reinforcing bars. 4. When exposed to view in the final structure, bolts shall be of a length that will extend entirely through but not more than 1/4-inch (6.4mm) beyond the nuts unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
F. Install concrete fill on a continuous wire mesh of not less than 14 gage welded wire fabric, 2 inch (50.8mm) square, supported approximately inch (12.7mm) above the bottom of pans. Screed concrete fill level and finish with wood float.
3.16 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Where supplementary cementitious materials are used, extra precautions shall be taken to prevent premature drying.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft.(0.98k/m ) x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, con- tinue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
E. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure un- formed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other sur- faces.
F. All structural concrete shall be continuously water cured in accordance with recom- mendation of ACI 305R, ACI 308 and as modified below. To avoid self desiccation of the concrete mix, only water curing method shall be used to cure the structural con- King Abdullah Sports City
crete. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Maximum total dissolved solids in water used for curing shall not exceed 1000 parts per million. 2. Water curing shall be continuous until the compressive strength has reached 70% of the specified strength, but not less than what is specified in Table 2.1 of ACI308R. 3. Saturate burlaps shall be covered with a plasticized sheet vapour barrier, min- imum 6 mils (0.15mm) in thickness and shall be kept in contact with the con- crete surface at all times.
4. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas sub- jected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing com- pound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
5. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a sec- ond coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing pe- riod. 6. Interior slabs to receive resilient flooring: Cure only with moisture re- taining cover. Do not cure with curing compound. 7. Interior slabs to receive thin set of tile: Cure only with moisture retaining cover. Do not cure with curing compound.
3.17 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other con- taminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than [three] [seven] [14] 28 days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if sur- face is rough or porous. B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing com- pound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.18 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written in- structions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least [one] [six] two month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 50mm deep in King Abdullah Sports City
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.19 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Repair and patch defective areas when agreed by Company Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Company Rep- resentatives approval. Repair and replacement work will be done at Contractors ex- pense.
B. Defective Concrete is defined as concrete which is under strength, out of line, level or plumb, or shows objectionable cracks, honeycombing, rock pockets voids, spalling, exposed reinforcement, that has any sawdust, wood, or debris embedded in it, or is otherwise defective, and in the Company Representatives judgment these defects impair the proper strength or appearance of the work. Any concrete work not in ac- cordance with the Specification and Drawings will be deemed to be defective.
C. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland ce- ment to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
D. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 10mm in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 25mm. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mix- ture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's du- rability and structural performance as determined by Company Repre- sentative.
E. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.244mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unre- inforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mor- tar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair un- derlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer accord- ing to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6.4mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply King Abdullah Sports City
repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25.4mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforce- ment with at least a 3/4-inch (19.1mm) clearance all around. Dampen con- crete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete ex- cept without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with ad- jacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 25mm or less in diameter with patch- ing mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
F. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject Company Representatives ap- proval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.
G. Concrete Repaair shall comply with in Acordance with SAER-5083 Concrete Repair manual.
H. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Company Representatives approval.
3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: The Contactor shall engage a special inspector and inde- pendent approved agencies to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. The selection of the independent approved agencies shall be subject to the approval of the Company Representative. The Company Representative may, at his discretion, call for tests tor inspections to be verified by separate approved agency. B. Inspections:
1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Post-installed concrete anchors, per ICC-ES recommendations. 5. Verification of use of required design mixture. 6. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 7. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 8. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.
C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained ac- cording to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following require- ments:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement for each composite sam- ple, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; King Abdullah Sports City
ASTM C173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; ]one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Water Content: In accordance with AASHTO T318. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4C) and below and when 80 deg F (26.7C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder spec- imens for each composite sample.
8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4Mpa). 10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Company Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compres- sive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28- day tests. 11. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Company Representative but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Company Representative. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to deter- mine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or by other methods as directed by Company Representative. a. If test results indicate that compressive strength requirements have not been met, the Contractor shall justify that the load carrying capacity of the structure has not been reduced. Carry out tests of cores drilled from the area in question as directed by the Company Representative in ac- cordance with ASTM C43 and ACI 318 Section 5.6.5. b. If the compressive tests of the core specimens fail to show the com- pressive strength specified, the concrete shall be deemed defective and shall be replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Company Representative. Perform load tests as outlined in ASTM C39, as directed by the Company Representative, on the questionable portion of the Work. 13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified re- quirements. 14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents or required standards.
1. Notify the testing agency and the Company Representative at least 48 hours before concrete is to be poured or reinforcing is covered up. 2. Before any concrete is poured on any particular portion of the building, the reinforcing steel and form dimensions will be inspected by the Testing Agency. Any errors or discrepancies shall be corrected before concrete is placed. 3. In addition to other required inspections, the following are subject to Special Inspection as per IBC Chapter 1704.4: a. Placement of Reinforcing Steel b. Welding of Reinforcing Steel 4. A special inspector from the Testing Agency shall be present during all field bending of reinforcement. 5. Installation of deformed bar anchors to be tested in accordance with Section 7.1 of AWS D1.1. 6. Welding of Reinforcement: There shall be continuous inspection during all welding of reinforcement. All butt welds to be inspected using radiographic testing or other agreed form of ND testing. At the Owners option recognized non-destructive tests such as resistance, Magnetic Particle Examination, and Liquid Penetrant Inspection may be used to inspect the welds. 7. Comply with ICC-ES approvals with respect to special inspection re- quired during installation. 8. Testing and inspection of mechanical splices and reinforcing couplers to con- form to manufacturer's recommendations and ICC-ES approval. E. Survey and Adjustment: Continuously observe formwork operations, record such observations on a daily basis, and submit reports of the results. Instrument check forms before and during concrete placement to assure no movement has taken place. Make appropriate corrections to reposition displaced forms.
1. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E1155 within 48 hours of finishing. 2. Certify, by written report submitted on a weekly basis, for each level and story that the elevations, finish lines and building lines of the hardened concrete are within tolerances, as substantiated by transit survey; also that all embeds and inserts have been installed within tolerance.
END OF SECTION 033000
Besix King Abdullah Sports City SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200012 REV 1 | 22 December 2011
CONTRACT
This report takes into account the particular instructions and requirements of our client. It is not intended for and should not be relied upon by any third party and no responsibility is undertaken to any third party.
J ob number 218250 Ove Arup & Partners Ltd
www.arup.com REV A
Re3isio( A )evision A Contra#t Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 Rev 1.0 | February 2011 REFERENCE DESIGN
SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
Job number 214607
Arup Gulf Ltd 13 Fitzroy Street London W1T 4BQ arup.com Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 2 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This is a design build/ contractor engineered section. Work includes structural design, drawings, obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction, fabricating, finishing and installation of the works described. B. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Elevator machine beams, hoist beams, and/or divider beams. 5. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 6. Steel girders for supporting wood frame construction. 7. Prefabricated building columns. 8. Shelf angles. 9. Metal ladders. 10. Ladder safety cages. 11. Alternating tread devices. 12. Metal ships' ladders and/or pipe crossovers. 13. Metal floor plate and supports. 14. Structural-steel door frames. 15. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards and/or steel edgings and/or loading-dock edge angles. 16. Metal bollards. 17. Pipe and/or Downspout guards. 18. Abrasive metal nosings and/or treads and/or thresholds. 19. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. T-Sheet Component or Elements:
1. Type AM-301 Row extension for wheelchair. 2. Type AM-302 As AM-301, but adapted for use with the media desk Type AM-308. 3. Type AM-305 Camera platform and balustrade. 4. Type AM-306 Camera platform and balustrade surround and gate. 5. Type AM-307 Camera platform and balustrade surround and gate. 6. Type AM-308 Riser access metal deck. 7. Type AM-311 Galvanised steps for temporary and permanent use. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 3 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
8. Type AM-312 Galvanised steps (3 step unit). 9. Type AM-401 Metal Ladder - Cat ladder 10. Type AM-402 Metal Ladder - Ship ladder 11. Type AM-403 Galvanized steel maintenance access walkway including associated balustrade. 12. Type AM-701 Freestanding metal framed and topped bar counter with bin. Counter to be 1200h x 400d x length as drawing. 13. Type AM-702, as AM-701, but with reduced height for the disabled. Counter to be 1200l x 400d x height to suit wheelchair users. 14. Type AM-705 Metal wearing bars. 10mm wide stainless steel wearing bars set into slab surface @ 600mm CRS protruding 10mm from slab surface. 15. Type AM-706 Minbar. 16. Type AM-707 Stainless steel capping top ablutions fountain 17. Type ASE-101 Fall arrest/restraint cable system (Note: Refer to the Building Management Systems by Specialist, only finishes to be covered by this Section). 18. Type CLG-805 Net ceiling. 19. Type EWS-801 Gold plated metal lunar emblem 20. Type TRM-401 Metal skirting. 21. Type TRM-501 Stair nosings. 22. Type EXT-321 Tree grilles. 23. Type EXT-321a Ground lighting grille (to minaret). D. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. E. Related Sections: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. Refer to the Structural Engineers documentation. 2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. Refer to the Structural Engineers documentation. 3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." Refer to the Structural Engineers documentation. 4. Section 055100 "Metal Stairs." 5. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings." 6. Section 055300 "Metal Gratings." 7. Section 057000 "Decorative Metal." 8. Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings." 9. Section 088000 Glazing. 10. Section 102213 "Wire Mesh Partitions." 11. Section 329300 "Plants" for tree grates. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 4 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
indicated, including Seismic Design, refer to the Structural Engineers documentation. Also refer to Clause 1.2A. B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. C. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Devices: Alternating tread devices shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ICC's International Building Code. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces. E. For the purposes of this Specification, External also refers to non-air-conditioned Internal areas of the buildings. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Metal nosings and treads. 4. Paint products. 5. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and/or tread. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 5 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 or number as indicated on Drawing. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36M. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316L. D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 6 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36M or ASTM A 283M, Grade C or D. F. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. I. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 41 by 41 mm or as indicated on Drawing or to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653M, commercial steel, Type B and/or structural steel, Grade 230, with Z275 coating; 2.8-mm or2-mm and/or1.6-mm nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B and/or structural steel, Grade 230; 2.5-mm and/or1.7-mm and/or 1.35-mm minimum thickness; unfinished and/or coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel and/or hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. J. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 3. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325M, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3; and, where required, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed flush countersunk stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M; with hex nuts, ASTM F 836M; and, where required, flat washers; Alloy Group A1 and/or Group A4. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where required, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M. G. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.3.8M. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 7 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M. J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M. K. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency employed by the contractor. L. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. M. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors and/or chemical anchors to contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group A1 and/or Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M. N. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 41 by 22 mm by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 75 mm long at not more than 200 mm o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Shop Primers: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified- alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc- rich primer. E. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 8 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1. Products: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC- Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. H. Non-shrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. I. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. J. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 20 MPa. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 9 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 3.2 by 38 mm, with a minimum 150-mm embedment and 50-mm hook, not less than 200 mm from ends and corners of units and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Refer to the Structural Engineers documentation 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated or required. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated. 1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated. 2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated. 3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes at 600 mm o.c. E. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 12.7-mm baseplates with four 16-mm anchor bolts and 6.4-mm top plates. F. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. G. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer and/or primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" where indicated. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 10 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
2.7 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 19-mm bolts, spaced not more than 150 mm from ends and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 50 mm larger than expansion or control joint. B. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. C. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. 2.8 PERMANENT ACCESS EQUIPMENT A. Type ASE-101 Fall arrest/restraint cable system:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fall Protect or equal and approved. b. Latchways - (Product: Mansafe) or equal and approved. c. Uniline Safety or equal and approved. 2.9 METAL LADDERS/ WALKWAYS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 406 mm and/or457 mm apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 300 mm apart. 3. Siderails: Continuous, 9.5-by-64-mm and/or12.7-by-64-mm steel flat bars, with eased edges. 4. Rungs: 19-mm- diameter and/or19-mm- square and/or25-mm- diameter and/or25-mm- square steel bars. 5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval.
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 11 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 12 mm and/or19 mm in least dimension. 8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 1500 mm o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 9. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners. 10. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. and/orprimer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." 2.10 LADDER SAFETY CAGES A. General: 1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 6 m o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 1200 mm o.c. between primary hoops. 3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages: 1. Primary Hoops: 6.4-by-100-mm flat bar hoops. 2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 6.4-by-50-mm flat bar hoops. 3. Vertical Bars: 4.8-by-38-mm flat bars secured to each hoop. 4. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners. 5. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. and/or primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." 2.11 ALTERNATING TREAD DEVICES A. Alternating Tread Devices: Fabricate alternating tread devices to comply with ICC's International Building Code. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following and/or available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: a. Lapeyre Stair Inc or equal and approved b. Schmidt Structural Products; a subsidiary of Penco Products, Inc or equal and approved. 3. Fabricate from steel and assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 12 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
4. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings." B. Galvanize exterior steel alternating tread devices, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners. C. Prime exterior steel alternating tread devices, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer or primer specified in Section 099600 "High- Performance Coatings." 2.12 METAL SHIPS' LADDERS and/or PIPE CROSSOVERS A. Provide metal ships' ladders and pipe crossovers where indicated or to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation. 1. Fabricate ships' ladders and/or pipe crossovers, including railings from steel.. 2. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 12 mm19 mm in least dimension. 3. Fabricate treads and platforms from rolled-steel floor plate.. 4. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings." B. Galvanize exterior steel ships' ladders and/or pipe crossovers, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners. C. Prime exterior steel ships' ladders and/or pipe crossovers, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. and/or primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. and/or primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." 2.14 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe and/or Schedule 80 steel pipe and/or steel shapes, as indicated Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 13 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1. Cap bollards with 6.4-mm- thick steel plate. 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary cutouts for controls and holes for wire. 3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire. B. Fabricate bollards with 9.5-mm- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 19-mm anchor bolts. 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards. C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe and/or tubing with 6.4-mm- thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 200 mm deep and 19 mm larger than OD of bollard. D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 6.4- mm wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1.5 mm less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 19 mm steel machine bolt. E. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer or primer to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. F. Fixed bollards shall, as a minimum:
1. Achieve a minimum certification of one of the following:
a. M30 P1 in accordance with ASTM F 25656-07 Standard Test Method for Vehicle Crash Testing of Perimeter Barrier. b. K4 (7.5 Ton (15,000lb) @ 30mph) in accordance with DoD SD- STD-0.2.01 Rev A, Test Method for Vehicle Crash Testing of Perimeter Barriers and Gates. c. V/7 500/48/90:1 in accordance with PAS 68:2010 Impact test specifications for vehicle security barriers. d. Stainless steel finish. e. Minimum height: 700mm. f. Minimum diameter: 160mm. g. Maximum clear space between bollards, structural elements or other HVM measures: 1200mm. h. Maximum clear spacing between bollards: 1200mm. 2.15 PIPE and/or DOWNSPOUT GUARDS A. Fabricate pipe and/or downspout guards from 9.5-mm- thick by 300-mm- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 50-mm clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 19- mm anchor bolts. B. Galvanize pipe and/or downspout guards. C. Prime pipe and/or downspout guards with zinc-rich primer. and/or primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 14 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
2.16 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS and/or TREADS and/or THRESHOLDS A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Gradus - (Product: XT Range) Internal or equal and approved. 2. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 100 mm wide with 6-mm and/or25-mm lip, for casting into concrete steps. 3. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 38 by 38 mm, for casting into concrete curbs. 4. Treads: Cross-hatched units, full depth of tread with 19-by-19-mm nosing, for application over bent plate treads or existing stairs. 5. Thresholds: Fluted-saddle-type units, 125 mm wide by 12 mm high, with tapered edges. 6. Thresholds: Fluted-interlocking- (hook-strip-) type units, 125 mm wide by 16 mm high, with tapered edge. 7. Thresholds: Plain-stepped- (stop-) type units, 125 mm wide by 12 mm high, with 12-mm step. B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer. C. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate holes not more than 100 mm from ends and not more than 300 mm o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by manufacturer. 1. Provide two rows of holes for units more than 125 mm wide, with two holes aligned at ends and intermediate holes staggered. D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units. E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units. 2.17 TREE GRILLES & MINERET LIGHTING GRILLE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative):
1. Orsogril or equal and approved. 2. Elefant or equal and approved. 3. Barnett and Bates or equal and approved. 2.18 NET CEILING A. Type CLG-805 Net Ceiling System: Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 15 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product (or equal and approved by Company Representative): a. Schelde Sports reference S10.W4609, or equal and approved. 2. 2mm diameter nylon net, mesh 45mm x 45mm with white cord. 3. Galvanized steel trackway. 4. System shall include all required fixings. 2.19 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates. C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 2.20 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 200 mm unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. 2.21 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.22 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 16 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
2.23 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer or primers specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting". C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." and/or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." and/or requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High- Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 17 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Bollard installation type subject to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. B. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing or to manufacturers details. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. C. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors and/or anchor bolts and/or through bolts. Provide four 19-mm bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Embed anchor bolts at least 100 mm in concrete. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 18 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
D. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete and/or in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 200 mm deep and 19 mm larger than OD of bollard to contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 3 mm toward bollard. E. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings to contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Center and align bollards in holes 75 mm above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. F. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe sleeves preset into concrete and/or formed or core-drilled holes not less than 200 mm deep and 19 mm larger than OD of sleeve to contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 3 mm toward internal sleeve. G. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 75 mm above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured. H. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 19-mm machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish padlocks. I. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water or to manufacturers details. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 3.4 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated. B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation. 3.5 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 19 of 19 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1. Use non-shrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-shrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop- painted surfaces. 1. Apply by spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." and/or Section 099123 "Interior Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000
REV A
Re3isio( A )evision A Contra#t
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 Rev 1.0 | August 2011
SECTION 055100 METAL STAIRS
Job number 214607
Arup Gulf Ltd 13 Fitzroy Street London W1T 4BQ arup.com Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 2 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This is a design build/ contractor engineered section. Work includes structural design, drawings, obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction, fabricating, finishing and installation of the works described. B. Section Includes: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled and/or precast concrete and/or epoxy-resin-filled and/or abrasive-coating-finished formed-metal treads. 2. Ornamental steel-framed stairs. 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 4. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 5. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge. C. T-sheet Component or Elements:
1. Type STR-101 Metal stair. 2. Type STR-102 Ceremonial players stair. 3. Type STR-103 Metal stair to Minbar (AM-706). D. Related Sections: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings installed at locations other than in metal stairs and/or alternating tread devices. 3. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 4. Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental metal railings. 5. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 6. Section 093000 "Tiling" for ceramic-tile treads and landings for ornamental steel-framed stairs. 7. Section 096340 "Stone Flooring" for stone treads and landings for ornamental steel-framed stairs. 8. Section 096400 "Wood Flooring" for wood treads and landings for ornamental steel-framed stairs. 9. Section 096613 "Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring" and/or Section 096623 "Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring" for terrazzo treads and landings for ornamental steel-framed stairs. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 3 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
10. Section 102213 "Wire Mesh Partitions" for wire mesh security partitions and doors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Load: 4.79 kN/sq. m. 2. Concentrated Load: 1.33 kN applied on an area of 2580 sq. mm. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or L/360 or 6.4 mm, whichever is less. C. Structural Performance: Generally the loading of barriers, fences and gates that may be subject to crowd loading are to comply with the requirement of the Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds, 5 th Edition, 2008, section 11: 1. Horizontal imposed loads for barriers: a. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, aligned at right angles to the direction of spectator movement: 3.0 kN/m length. b. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, parallel to the direction of spectator movement: 2.0 kN/m length. c. Barriers for seating decks, adjacent to the end row of seats and protecting spectators from falling sideways: 1.0 kN/m length. d. Barriers for seating decks, behind a rear row of seats and protecting spectators from falling backwards: 1.0 kN/m length. e. Barriers positioned within 530mm in front of seats: 1.5 kN/m length. f. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned at right angles to the direction of movement of spectators: 3.0 kN/m length. g. Barriers for stairways, landings, and ramps, aligned with the direction of movement of spectators: 2.0 kN/m length. h. Barriers for gangways in standing areas, aligned at right angles to the direction of spectator movement: 5.0 kN/m length. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093 sq. m. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 4 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 1. Prefilled metal-pan stair treads. 2. Precast concrete treads. 3. Epoxy-resin-filled stair treads. 4. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate finishes. 5. Abrasive nosings. 6. Metal floor plate treads. 7. Paint products. 8. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Precast concrete treads. 2. Epoxy-resin-filled stair treads. 3. Stair treads with nonslip-aggregate surface finish. 4. Metal floor plate treads. 5. Grating treads. 6. Abrasive nosings. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer and/or testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for stairs and/or railings. 1. Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 5 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial and/or Service class. 2. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class. 3. Ornamental Stairs: Architectural class. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) and/or ASTM A 513. C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36M or ASTM A 283M, Grade C or D. D. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface and/or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following and/or available to contractor design, subject to Company Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 6 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
Representative approval that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. To be selected from the manufacturer's standard range by the Company Representative. E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011M or ASTM A 1018M. F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510M. G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. H. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 170, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. I. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 205, unless another grade is required by design loads. J. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653M, Z275 coating, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 230, unless another grade is required by design loads. K. Expanded-Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded) and/or Type II (expanded and flattened), Class 1 (uncoated). 1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13 and/or 1-1/2 number 10 Designation to be as confirmed by the Company Representative. L. Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011M, commercial steel Type B, 1.52 mm or thickness as indicated on Drawing, with 6.4-mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows and/or with 3.2-by-25.4-mm round end slotted holes in staggered rows as-is-of-Design Product: Provide product with perforations matching. Manufacturer's name; product name or designation to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. M. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653M, Z275 coating, commercial steel Type B, 1.63 mm or thickness as indicated on Drawing , with 6.4- mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows Refer to the Design Drawings. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide product with perforations matching Manufacturer's name, product name and designation to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. 2.3 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T6. B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. C. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 7 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
D. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded semi-red brass). E. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 2.4 ABRASIVE NOSINGS A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron and/or aluminum and/or bronze and/or nickel silver, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval: 2. Configuration: Cross-hatched units, 75 mm and/or 100 mm wide without lip. 3. Configuration: Cross-hatched angle-shaped units, same depth as bar-grating treads and 25 to 38 mm wide. B. Extruded Units: Aluminum and/or Bronze units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval
2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1.5 mm above aluminum extrusion. 3. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs. 4. Nosings: Square-back units,48 mm and/or 75 mm and/or 100 mm wide, without lip. 5. Nosings: Two-piece units, 75 mm wide, with sub-channel for casting into concrete. C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer. D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete. E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 8 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs and/or stairs indicated to be galvanized and/or stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer. D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M. E. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.3.8M. F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M. G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M. H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors and/or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group A1 and/or Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." and/or Section 099600 "High- Performance Coatings." and/or Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified- alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc- rich primer. E. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative Approval: Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 9 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC- Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. H. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. I. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 20 MPa unless otherwise indicated. J. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and non-glazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials. K. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185M, 152 by 152 mm, W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 PRECAST CONCRETE TREADS A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 35 MPa and a total air content of not less than 4 percent or more than 6 percent. B. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 50 by 50 mm by 1.6- mm- diameter wire; comply with ASTM A 185M and ASTM A 82M, except for minimum wire size. 2.8 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain. B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 10 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint and/or Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay and/or Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed and/or Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat- head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.9 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates and/or channels and/or plates or channels and/or tubes. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and/or tube stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel plate and/or channel and/or plate or channel and/or tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements and/or indicated. 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 1.7 mm and/or indicated. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold and/or hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet, where indicated. 3. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 11 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
4. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 5. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 6. Attach abrasive nosings to risers. 7. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication. 8. Provide epoxy-resin-filled treads, reinforced with glass fibers, with slip- resistant, abrasive surface. 9. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to produce smooth soffits. C. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and platforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 2.5 mm and/or indicated. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Directly weld risers and treads to stringers; locate welds on underside of stairs. 3. Provide platforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as treads. Weld platforms to platform framing. 4. Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy- bonded abrasive finish. D. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from rolled-steel and/or abrasive-surface floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 6.4 mm and/or needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 4.8 mm and/or needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 3.2 mm and/or indicated. 1. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers of same material as treads. 2. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers from steel sheet not less than 2.5 mm thick, welded to tread nosings and stiffeners and to platforms. 3. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener, and with open risers. 4. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets. 5. Fabricate platforms with integral nosings matching treads and weld to platform framing. E. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." 1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded and/or pressure-locked steel grating with 32-by-5-mm bearing bars at 24 mm o.c. and/or 25-by-5-mm bearing bars at 17 mm o.c. and/or 25-by-3-mm bearing bars at 11 mm o.c. and crossbars at 100 mm o.c. 2. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded and/or pressure-locked steel grating with openings in gratings no more than8 mm and/or 12 mm and/or 19 mm in least dimension. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 12 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
3. Surface: Plain and/or Serrated. 4. Finish: Shop primed and/or Painted and/or Galvanized. 5. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate and/or cast abrasive nosing and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. 6. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads. Provide toe plates at open-sided edges of grating platforms. Weld grating to platform framing. 2.10 STAIR RAILINGS A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings and/or Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings." 1. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of pressed steel and/or gray-iron castings, as shown. 2. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings. 3. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Rails and Posts: 41-mm- diameter and/or 38-mm- square top and bottom rails and 38-mm- square posts. 2. Picket Infill: 13-mm- square pickets spaced less than 100 mm clear. 3. Expanded-Metal Infill: Expanded-metal panels edged with U-shaped channels made from steel sheet not less than 1.1 mm thick. Orient expanded metal with long dimension of diamonds parallel to top rail and/or perpendicular to top rail and/or vertical. 4. Perforated-Metal Infill: Perforated-metal panels edged with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated metal and not less than 1.1 mm thick. Orient perforated metal with pattern parallel to top rail and/or perpendicular to top rail and/or horizontal and/or vertical and/or as indicated on Drawings. 5. Mesh Infill: Woven wire mesh crimped into 25-by-13-by-3-mm steel channel frames. Orient wire mesh with diamonds vertical and/or wires perpendicular and parallel to top rail and/or wires horizontal and vertical. 6. Intermediate Rails Infill: 41-mm- diameter and/or 38-mm- square intermediate rails spaced less than 305 mm and/or 533 mm clear. 7. Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to match guards. Provide with cam-type, self-closing and/or spring hinges for fastening to wall and overlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction opposite egress. C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint and/or Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay and/or Type 3 Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 13 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed and/or Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter. D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 1. As detailed. 2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. 3. By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings. 4. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated. 5. By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings and/or flush-elbow fittings and/or elbow fittings of radius indicated. E. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less. H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous-metal components. 3. For non-galvanized railings, provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.11 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 14 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." and/or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." and/or minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Exterior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 15 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width. H. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonmetallic, non-shrink grout unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.3 INSTALLING RAILINGS A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with post-installed anchors and bolts. B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and/or with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. Provide bracket with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements and/or as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant- treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 5. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. 6. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 16 of 16 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop- painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055100 REV A
Re3isio( A )evision A Contra#t Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 Rev 1.0 | August 2011 REFERENCE DESIGN
SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
Job number 214607
Arup Gulf Ltd 13 Fitzroy Street London W1T 4BQ arup.com Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 2 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This is a design build/ contractor engineered section. Work includes structural design, drawings, obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction, fabricating, finishing and installation of the works described. B. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum decorative railings with stainless-steel, wire-rope guard infill. 2. Stainless-steel decorative railings with stainless-steel, wire-rope guard infill. 3. Steel decorative railings with stainless-steel, wire-rope guard infill. 4. Glass- supported railings. 5. Post-supported railings with glass infill. C. T-Sheet Component or Elements:
1. Type AM-602 Spectator separation barrier. 2. Type BAL-101 Structural glazed balustrade, clamp fixed. 3. Type BAL-102 Glazed balustrade and galvanized mild steel handrail, fixed to concrete upstand. 4. Type BAL-103 Glass balustrade (Fully glazed) with recessed fixing, to royal box areas 5. Type BAL-104 Glass balustrade (Fully glazed) with recessed fixing, to disabled seating platform surrounds. 6. Type BAL-105 Stainless steel balustrade with laminated safety glass infill. 7. Type BAL-106 Galvanized mild steel balustrade with metal infill and handrail. 8. Type BAL-107 Galvanised mild steel concession queuing barrier. 9. Type BAL-108 Galvanised mild steel concession queuing barrier with self closing gate. 10. Type BAL-109 Glazed balustrade and stainless steel handrail - recessed stainless steel floor channel. 11. Type BAL-112 Open galvanized mild steel balustrade. 12. Type BAL-114 Open galvanized mild steel balustrade. 13. Type BAL-115 Open galvanized mild steel balustrade assembly. 14. Type BAL-117 Open galvanized mild steel. 15. Type BAL-121 Galvanized mild steel handrail. 16. Type BAL-122 Galvanized mild steel handrail. 17. Type BAL-123 Galvanized mild steel handrail. 18. Type BAL-124 Galvanized mild steel handrail. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 3 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
19. Type BAL-125 Galvanized mild steel handrail. 20. Type BAL-126 Stainless steel handrail. 21. Type BAL-127 Stainless steel handrail. 22. Type BAL-133 Glazed balustrade, clamped at stringer (STR-103) with bronze anodized aluminium handrail.
D. Related Sections: 1. Section 055000 Metal Fabrications. 2. Section 055100 "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings included with metal stairs. 3. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe and tube components. 4. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95. 2. Copper Alloys: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 3. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 4. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 5. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12, "Structural Properties of Glass." C. Structural Performance: Generally the loading of barriers, fences and gates that may be subject to crowd loading are to comply with the requirement of the Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds, 5 th Edition, 2008, section 11: 1. Horizontal imposed loads for barriers: a. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, aligned at right angles to the direction of spectator movement: 3.0 kN/m length. b. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, parallel to the direction of spectator movement: 2.0 kN/m length. c. Barriers for seating decks, adjacent to the end row of seats and protecting spectators from falling sideways: 1.0 kN/m length. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 4 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
d. Barriers for seating decks, behind a rear row of seats and protecting spectators from falling backwards: 1.0 kN/m length. e. Barriers positioned within 530mm in front of seats: 1.5 kN/m length. f. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned at right angles to the direction of movement of spectators: 3.0 kN/m length. g. Barriers for stairways, landings, and ramps, aligned with the direction of movement of spectators: 2.0 kN/m length. h. Barriers for gangways in standing areas, aligned at right angles to the direction of spectator movement: 5.0 kN/m length. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093 sq. m. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails. D. Thermal Movements: Provide for changes in dimension resulting from changes in temperature in any of its parts, its supporting framework and brackets without any reduction in the performance below the minimum levels require herein. Use the following external surface temperature ranges:
a. Heavyweight materials, light color: 0C to +60C. b. Heavyweight materials, dark color: 0C to +80C. c. Lightweight insulated materials, light color: 0C to +70C. d. Lightweight insulated materials, dark color: 0C to +90C. e. Clear glass: 0C to +70C. f. Coated glass: 0C to +90C. 2. E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups. Retesting of products that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Testing Agency to be approved by Company Representative. 2. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. 3. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 4. Notify the Company Representative. Seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory mockups will be tested. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 5 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including mechanical finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Each type of glass required. 3. Fittings and brackets. 4. Welded connections. 5. Brazed connections. 6. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer and/or testing agency. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. E. Preconstruction test reports. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 6 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by the Company Representative, except with the Company Representative's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to the Company Representative for review. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC and/or the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups as shown on Drawings or schedule. 2. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 600 mm in length. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Mechanical Completion. G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site or at a location as confirmed by the Company Representative. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 7 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not suit structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval: 1. Stainless-Steel Decorative Railings. 2. Steel Decorative Railings. 3. Glass-Supported Railings. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Provide either formed- or cast-metal brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. 4. Provide extruded-aluminum brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal anchorage. Locate set screws on bottom of bracket. 2.3 STAINLESS STEEL A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316Grade MT 316L. B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316Grade TP 316L. C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, or CF 8M. D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316Type 316L. E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316Type 316L. F. Wire Rope and Fittings: Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 8 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative): a. Cable Connection (The) or equal and approved. b. Secosouth, Inc or equal and approved. 2. Wire Rope: 1-by-19 and/or 7-by-7 and/or 7-by-19 configuration as indicated on drawing wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 316. 3. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless steel, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. G. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, , Class 3 (corrosion-resisting steel), made from stainless-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 666, Type 316. 1. Style Designation: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. H. Perforated Metal: Stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 and/or Type 316L, 1.59 mm with 6.4-mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows. I. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond and/or square pattern, 50-mm woven-wire mesh, made from 3.5-mm nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304 and/or Type 316. 2.4 STEEL A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) and/or ASTM A 513. B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267,Type 1. 1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13 and/or 1-1/2 number 10 . E. Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel Type B, 1.52 mm or thickness as indicated on Drawing with 6.4-mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows . F. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating, commercial steel Type B, 1.63 mm or thickness as indicated on Drawing with 6.4- mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows and/or with 3.2-by-25.4-mm round end slotted holes in staggered rows . G. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond and/or square pattern, 50-mm woven-wire mesh, made from 3.5-mm nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510M. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 9 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1 (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Glass Color: Clear. 2. Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: 19.0 mm. 3. Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: As required by structural loads, 19.0 mm. 4. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: 10.0 mm. 5. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, 10.0 mm. 6. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3 with two plies of glass and polyvinyl butyral interlayer not less than 1.52 mm thick. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval: C. Ceramic-Coated Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel applied by silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's "Engineering Standards Manual" and with other requirements specified. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval: a. Glass Color: Clear. 2. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's full range. D. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Glazing cement, setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails. 1. Glazing Cement: Non-shrinking organic cement designed for curing by passing an electric current through metal subrail holding glass panel, as standard with manufacturer. E. Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in post-supported railings. 2.6 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Aluminum Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners where exposed. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 10 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
4. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 5. Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless otherwise indicated and/or exposed fasteners are unavoidable and/or exposed fasteners are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 1. Provide Phillips and/or tamper-resistant and/or square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors and/or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group A1 and Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Electrical Components: Provide internal, fluorescent light fixtures and electrical components, required as part of illuminated railings, that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL. B. Plastic Handrail Caps: Thermoplastic rail covering, color as indicated or from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. D. Brazing Rods: For copper-alloy railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be brazed and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. E. Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings: Paints and coatings applied to interior decorative metal railings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 11 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC- Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. H. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 "Interior Painting." I. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified- alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc- rich primer. J. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. K. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#26 or Water-based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134. L. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 099123 "Interior Painting." M. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI#77 and compatible with primer and topcoat. N. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat. O. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. P. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Q. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic- controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 12 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation. D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations. G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. H. Connections: To Contractors proposal. I. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint. J. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings. K. Brazed Connections: Connect copper-alloy railings by brazing. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Braze corners and seams continuously. 1. Use materials and methods that match color of base metal, minimize distortion, and develop maximum strength and corrosion resistance. 2. Remove flux immediately. 3. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and brazed surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. L. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 13 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. M. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By bending and/or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. 2. By flush bends and/or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings. 3. By radius bends of radius indicated and/or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated. 4. By bending to smallest radius that will not result in distortion of railing member. N. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. O. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. P. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less. Q. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. R. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. S. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. T. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from stainless-steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. 1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings. U. Perforated-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made from same metal as railings in which they are installed. 1. Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated metal and not less than 1.1 mm thick. 2. Orient perforated metal with pattern parallel to top rail Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 14 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
V. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2.9 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glazing panels. 1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces 2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. B. Structural Glass Balusters: Factory-bond glass to aluminum base and top-rail channels in railing manufacturer's plant using glazing cement to comply with manufacturer's written specifications, unless field glazing is standard with manufacturer. C. Structural Balusters: Provide glass panels to Contractors design for both straight and curved sections. D. Infill Panels: Provide glass panels to Contractors design for both straight and curved sections. 2.10 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Mechanical Finish: AA-M3x (Mechanical Finish: as specified); sand top rails, handrails, and intermediate rails in one direction only, parallel to length of railing, with 120- and 320-grit abrasive. After installation, polish railings with No. 0 steel wool immersed in paste wax, then rub to a luster with a soft dry cloth. C. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 15 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
D. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm. 1. Color: To match faade, subject to Company Representative approval. E. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: To match faade, subject to Company Representative approval. F. Siliconized Polyester Finish: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester- enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.005 mm for primer and 0.02 mm for topcoat. 1. Color and Gloss: To match faade, subject to Company Representative approval. G. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604or AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50or 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: To match faade, subject to Company Representative approval. H. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three or Four-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50 or 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: To match faade, subject to Company Representative approval. 2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. D. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. E. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7. F. Mirror-like Reflective, Non-directional Polish: No. 8. G. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 16 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
H. Sputter-Coated Finish: Titanium nitride coating deposited by magnetic sputter- coating process over indicated mechanical finish. 2.13 STEEL FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 5. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 6. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. D. For non-galvanized-steel railings, provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. E. Preparing Non-galvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." and/or SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." and/or requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Railings Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High- Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Railings: SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer and/or primers specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" unless zinc-rich primer is and/or primers specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 17 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
G. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." and/or Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." 1. Color: To match faade, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. H. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer. 1. Color: To match faade, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval . I. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat non-galvanized ferrous metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Treat prepared metal with iron-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured- film thickness not less than 0.04 mm. 4. Color: To match faade, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval . J. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat galvanized metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter. 2. Treat prepared metal with zinc-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured- film thickness not less than 0.04 mm. 4. Color: To match faade, to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 18 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3 m. C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum and copper alloys that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 50 mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 150 mm of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material or attached to post with set screws. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 19 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 3-mm buildup, sloped away from post or anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For aluminum railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. 2. For copper-alloy railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. 3. For stainless-steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. 4. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry to Contractor design. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces to Contractor design. C. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt or predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant- treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 5. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 6. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets with toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. 3.6 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS A. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written instructions. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 20 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
1. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert and connect factory- fabricated and -assembled glass panels if glass was bonded to base and top rail channels in factory. 2. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert glass into base channel and bond with glazing cement unless glass was bonded to base and top rail channels in factory. a. Support glass panels in base channel at quarter points with channel- shaped setting blocks that also act as shims to maintain uniform space for glazing cement. Fill remaining space in base channel with glazing cement for uniform support of glass. 3. Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before securing in position. 4. Erect glass railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized technical personnel. B. Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts and other metal railing components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field. Protect edges from damage. 3.7 INSTALLING PLASTIC HANDRAIL CAPS A. Apply plastic handrail caps to top rails and handrails, where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions for cutting, mounting, forming, welding, cleaning, applying end caps, and finishing. B. Minimize number of joints in plastic caps by installing in lengths as long as possible. Allow for shortening of plastic cap caused by welding and splicing process; butt ends together to produce hairline joint. 1. Continuously weld, splice, miter, and end-cap joints using cap manufacturer's electric welding iron designed for this purpose. Remove welding flash while material is still soft. 2. Weld only prongs on underside of plastic cap at splice, miter, and end-cap joints. After cutting plastic cap, dress ends with file to produce a hairline fit between abutting sections. After mounting cap, polish top surface with cap manufacturer's solvent designed for this purpose until joint becomes almost invisible. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in the completed Work. Railings will be tested according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with performance requirements. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 21 of 21 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
C. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Company Representative and will comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry. B. Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample. C. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Mechanical Completion. D. Clean wood rails and/or plastic handrail caps by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry. E. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop- painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness. F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." G. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Mechanical Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 057300 REV A
Re3isio( A )evision A Contra#t
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 Rev 1.0 | August 2011 REFERENCE DESIGN
SECTION 057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
Job number 214607
Arup Gulf Ltd 13 Fitzroy Street London W1T 4BQ arup.com Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 2 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This is a design build/ contractor engineered section. Work includes structural design, drawings, obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction, fabricating, finishing and installation of the works described. B. Section Includes:
1. Metal linings/ panels. C. T-Sheet Component or Elements:
1. Type LIN-301 Anodized aluminum wall paneling. 2. Type LIN-303 Stainless steel skirting. 3. Type LIN-304 Aluminum panels - ceiling finish. 4. Type LIN-305 Metal panels, bonded to plywood backing, hung on supporting metal frame. To air supply nozzles. Anodized Aluminum finish to match external cladding Type A: Opaque External Wall. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for non-decorative metal fabrications. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design exterior decorative formed metal items, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Decorative formed metal items, including anchors and connections, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials involved and without exhibiting permanent deformation in any components: 1. Wind Loads: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. 2. Live Loads on Heating-Cooling Unit Enclosures: 4.8 kN/sq. m or a concentrated load of 1.3 kN on an area of 26 sq. cm, whichever produces the greater stress. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 3 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
C. Seismic Performance: Exterior decorative formed metal items, including anchors and connections, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 . 1. Component Importance Factor is 1.0. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces. E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. F. Barrier Loads: Handrails and Guards shall be in accordance with the Section 1607.7 of IBC and the following requirements sourced in the Guide to Safety in Sports Grounds (The Green Guide) (Department for Culture, Media and Sport Crown Copyright/ Football Licensing Authority),
1. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned at right angles to the direction of movement of spectators: Load = 3.0kN/m 2. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned with the direction of movement of spectators: Load = 2.0kN/m 3. Horizontal imposed loads will act at a height of 1100mm above the floor level when applied as a static load at right angles to the longitudinal axis. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal. 1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including mechanical finishes . D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 150-mm- square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 4 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and/or fabricator and/or organic-coating applicator and/or anodic finisher and/or powder-coating applicator and/or professional engineer . C. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Welding certificates. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each finish to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying organic coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality- control program to ensure compliance with requirements. C. Anodic Finisher Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying anodic finishes of type indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements. D. Powder-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying powder coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality- control program to ensure compliance with requirements. E. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. For mockup requirements, refer to schedule. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 5 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at or at a location as confirmed by the Company Representative. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces. B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INDICATIVE MANUFACTURERS A. Type LIN-301 Aluminum Cladding:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative):
a. SAS International or equal and approved. b. Lindner or equal and approved. B. Type LIN-304 Aluminum Panels:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative):
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 6 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
a. Gooding Aluminium (Product: Perforated Aluminum Sheet, Single Slots/ Parallel Pitch) or equal and approved b. Lindner - Customized metal ceiling or equal and approved. c. SAS - Customized metal ceiling or equal and approved.
2. Finish: Anodized. 3. 40% Free Area. 2.2 SHEET METAL A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Aluminum Sheet: Flat sheet complying with ASTM B 209M, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005- H32. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating, either commercial steel or forming steel. D. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed . E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain airtight and/or weathertight; as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. 1. ASTM D 1056, Type 1, Class A, grade as recommended by gasket manufacturer to obtain seal for application indicated. 2. Closed-cell polyurethane foam, adhesive on two sides, release paper protected. B. Sealants, Exterior: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone or polyurethane or polysulfide sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. C. Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834; of type and grade required to seal joints in decorative formed metal; and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. 1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 7 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded or brazed and as necessary for strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items. 1. Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined and will not cause discoloration. E. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting decorative formed metal items and for attaching them to other work unless otherwise indicated and/or exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method . 2. Provide Phillips and/or tamper-resistant and/or square or hex socket flat- head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. F. Structural Anchors: For applications indicated to comply with certain design loads, provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Nonstructural Anchors: For applications not indicated to comply with design loads, provide powder-actuated fasteners and/or metal expansion sleeve anchors or metal-impact expansion anchors of type, size, and material necessary for type of load and installation indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. H. Anchor Materials: 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group A1 or Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M. I. Sound-Deadening Materials: 1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test. 2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. J. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by decorative formed metal manufacturer. K. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal to metal and that will prevent telegraphing and oil canning and is compatible with substrate and noncombustible after curing. 1. Contact Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 80 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 8 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
2. Metal-to-Metal Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 30 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 70 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive: (Contact adhesive used to bond melamine-covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, ultrahigh molecular weight polyethylene, and rubber or wood veneer, 1/16 inch thick or less, to any surface): 250 g/L. 5. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." L. Isolation Coating: To Contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval.. 1. Coating shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.4 PAINTS AND COATINGS A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC- Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating copper-alloy products. E. Shop Primers: Comply with Section 099123 "Interior Painting." F. Universal Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc- rich primer. G. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. H. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#26 and/or Vinyl wash primer complying with MPI#80 and/or Water- based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134 . I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 9 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated. C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 12-mm- wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm and support with concealed stiffeners. D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use. 1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment. E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed to attach and support other construction. F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items. G. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed. 1. Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration of metal being joined. 2.6 CLOSURES AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following : 1. Fry Reglet Corporation or equal and approved. 2. Pittcon Industries or equal and approved.
B. Form closures and trim from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit tightly to adjoining construction, with weathertight joints at exterior installations . 1. Aluminum Sheet: 1.60 mm or Thickness required to comply with performance requirements. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 10 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
a. Finish: Anodized, where not concealed. 2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 1.32 mm or Thickness required to comply with performance requirements . a. Finish: Factory primed and/or Baked enamel and/or Siliconized polyester and/or High-performance organic coating and/or Powder coat . 3. Steel Sheet: 1.21 mm and/or Thickness required to comply with performance requirements. a. Finish: Stainless steel, where not concealed. 4. Closures and trim may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view and not exposed to weather. C. Conceal fasteners where possible; otherwise, locate where they are as inconspicuous as possible. Size fasteners to support closures and trim, with fasteners spaced to prevent buckling or waviness in finished surfaces. D. Drill and tap holes needed for securing closures and trim to other surfaces. E. Incorporate gaskets where indicated or needed for concealed, continuous seal at abutting surfaces. F. Miter or cope trim members at corners and reinforce with bent metal splice plates to form tight joints. 2.7 FILLER PANELS A. Form filler panels for closing ends of partition systems and for other applications indicated. Form from two sheets of metal of type and thickness indicated below, separated by channels formed from the same material, producing a panel of same thickness as partitions and/or mullions unless otherwise indicated. Incorporate reveals, trim, and concealed anchorages for attaching to adjacent surfaces. 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 1.63 mm or dimension as indicated on Drawing, a. Finish: To Contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. 2. Steel Sheet: 1.52 mm or dimension as indicated. . a. Finish: To Contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. Delete subparagraph below if not acceptable. 3. Filler panels may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view. B. Fill interior of panel with sound-deadening insulation permanently attached to inside panel faces. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 11 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
C. Adhesively attach gaskets to filler panel edges where they abut mullions or glazing. Use 25-mm- square material, unless otherwise indicated, set approximately 6 mm into channeled edge of filler panel. D. Attach gaskets to all edges of panels that abut adjacent surfaces to form a continuous seal. Use compressible gaskets or mastic sealing tape, applied to center of panel edges to be concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated. E. Do not mechanically fasten filler panels to mullions. 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet finish. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. D. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish items indicated on Drawings , To Contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. F. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker. C. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker. 1. Color: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. D. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. E. Siliconized Polyester Finish: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.005 mm for primer and 0.02 mm for topcoat. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 12 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. F. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and/or AAMA 2605 and containing not less than the percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat to meet the applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. G. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three or Four -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than the percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat to meet the applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. 2.10 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Preparing Galvanized Items for Factory Priming: Thoroughly clean galvanized decorative formed metal of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. B. Preparing Galvanized Items for Factory Finishing: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. C. Repairing Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. E. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.025 mm for topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. F. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 0.04 mm. Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 13 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. G. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.005 mm for primer and 0.02 mm for topcoat. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. H. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and/or AAMA 2605 and containing not less than the percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat to meet the applicable regulatory codes and other requirements.. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. I. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three and/or Four -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than the percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat to meet the applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. 2.11 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." B. Pretreatment: Immediately after cleaning, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. D. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 14 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
E. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 0.04 mm. Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. 2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. C. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B. D. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. E. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. F. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7. G. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8 finish. H. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative formed metal. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal. 1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 15 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated. D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, sealants, and flashings, as the Work progresses, to make exterior decorative formed metal items weatherproof. E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work progresses, to make interior decorative formed metal items soundproof or lightproof as applicable to type of fabrication indicated. F. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish. G. Install decorative-formed-metal-clad doors and frames to comply with requirements specified in Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." H. Apply joint treatment at joints of spackled-seam-type metal column covers. Comply with requirements in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths. B. Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample. C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness. 2. Retain first paragraph below if touchup painting is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." E. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 16 of 16 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Mechanical Completion. END OF SECTION 057500
Ove Arup & Partners Ltd
www.arup.com
Besix King Abdullah Sports City SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-20006 REV A | 27 January 2012
CONTRACT
This report takes into account the particular instructions and requirements of our client. It is not intended for and should not be relied upon by any third party and no responsibility is undertaken to any third party.
Job number 218250
King Abdullah Sports City INTERIOR PAINTING 64
KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200064 |Contract A | 27 January \\GLOBAL\LONDON\KASC2\4 INTERNAL DATA\06 SPECIFICATIONS\02 ARCHITECTU
Document Verification
Job title King Abdullah Sports City SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS Document title SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
Document ref KASC-XX- Revision Date Filename
Revision A 27 January 2012 Description
Name Signature
Filename Description
Name Signature
Filename Description
Name Signature
Filename Description
Name Signature
27 January 2012 URAL\CONTRACT ISSUE\TITLE PAGES\SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING TITLE .DOCX fication King Abdullah Sports City Job number 218250 SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING File reference
Contract issue. Document number revised. Notes and clarifications page added. Prepared by Checked by Jan Pratt Jan Pratt
Prepared by Checked by
Prepared by Checked by
Prepared by Checked by
Issue Document Verification with Document
Job number 218250 File reference docx issue. Document number revised. Notes and Approved by Mark Jeffs
Approved by
Approved by
Approved by
Issue Document Verification with Document
Besix King Abdullah Sports City SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200064|Contract A | 27 January 2012 \\GLOBAL\LONDON\KASC2\4 INTERNAL DATA\06 SPECIFICATIONS\02 ARCHITECTURAL\CONTRACT ISSUE\TITLE PAGES\SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING TITLE .DOCX Page 1
Notes and Clarifications
1. The document number for this specification has been amended since Reference Design. The number was; WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING TITLE Reference Design Now reads; KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200064 SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Revision A Contract
2. Specification requirements are as the following pages with the following amendments:- a) None. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 Rev 1.0 | August 2011 REFERENCE DESIGN
SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
Job number 214607
Arup Gulf Ltd 13 Fitzroy Street London W1T 4BQ arup.com Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 2 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This is a design build/ contractor engineered section. Work includes structural design, drawings, obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction, fabricating, finishing and installation of the works described. B. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 3. Steel. 4. Cast iron. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 7. Wood. 8. Gypsum board. 9. Plaster. 10. Spray-textured ceilings. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Refer to the Drawings. D. T-Sheet Component or Elements: 1. Type PT-101 Emulsion paint. 2. Type PT-111 Eggshell paint. 3. Type PT-121 Dust sealer (not floors). 4. Type PT-122 Dust sealer (floors). 5. Type PT-141 Epoxy floor paint. 6. Type PT-151 Masonry paint- internal. 7. Type PT-161 Metal paint. 8. Type PT-171 Anti-slip paint. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 3 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. None in Contract. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. For other mockup requirements, refer to schedule. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Company Representative specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Mechanical Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 4 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 10 and 35 deg C. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative).
1. ICI. 2. Crown. 3. Sika Gulf BSC. 4. Flowcrete. 5. Watco. 6. Technical Paint Services. 7. Saudi Industrial Paint Company (SIPCO). 8. Hammerite. 9. NVP. B. Products: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative): 1. Type PT-101 Emulsion: a. ICI - Product: Vinyl Emulsion Color: RAL 9010, or equal and approved. b. Crown - Product: Vinyl Emulsion Color: RAL 9010, or equal and approved. 2. Type PT-111 Eggshell: a. ICI - Product: Eggshell Color: RAL 9010, or equal and approved. b. Crown - Product: Eggshell Color: RAL 9010, or equal and approved. 3. Type PT-121 Dust sealer: a. Sika Gulf BSC - Product: Sikaguard - 701, or equal and approved. b. Technical Paint Services - Product: A144 Silicone Water Repellent, or equal and approved. c. Watco - Product: Safety Coat - Wallseal, or equal and approved. 4. Type PT-122 Dust sealer (floors): a. Sika Gulf BSC - Product: Sikafloor - 2420, or equal and approved. 5. Type PT-141 Epoxy floor paint: a. ICI Paints, or equal and approved. b. Sherwin-Williams Co, or equal and approved. c. Crown, or equal and approved. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 5 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
6. Type PT-151 Masonry paint: a. Sika Gulf BSC - Product: Masonry Paint Sealer, or equal and approved. b. Flowcrete - Product: Peran - White 050, or equal and approved. c. Watco UK Ltd - Product: Damp Proof Paint - White, or equal and approved. 7. Type PT-161 Metal paint: a. Hammerite - Product: Smooth Metal Paint, or equal and approved. b. Watco - Product: Hammercoat, or equal and approved. c. SIPCO - or equal and approved. 8. Type PT-171 Anti-slip paint: a. Watco - Product: Comfort Grip, Light Grey, or equal and approved. b. ICI - Product: Glidden Anti Slip Floor Paint, Color: Grey, or equal and approved. c. NVP - Product: Anti Slip Floor Paint water based, Color: Grey, or equal and approved. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Non-flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Under-coaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 6 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
E. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range or Match samples or as indicated in a color schedule, as confirmed by the Company Representative. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing agency to the approval of the Company Representative to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Contractor shall stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non- complying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor shall be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 7 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 8 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panel-boards and switch gear. b. Un-insulated metal piping. c. Un-insulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. i. Mechanical items to be painted, refer to the Drawings or as confirmed by the Company Representative. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panel-boards. b. Un-insulated metal piping. c. Un-insulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 9 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Mechanical items to be painted, refer to the Drawings. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Contractor will engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to the approval of the Company Representative to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Company Representative, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Non-traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 10 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 2. Latex over Latex Aggregate System: a. Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat, MPI #42. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 4. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 5. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #151. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #153. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #154. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 11 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
6. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Enamel System: a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3), MPI #60. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3), MPI #60. c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3), MPI #60. 2. Alkyd Floor Enamel System: a. Prime Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. c. Topcoat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. 3. Concrete Stain System: a. First Coat: Stain, interior, for concrete floors, MPI #58. b. Topcoat: Stain, interior, for concrete floors, MPI #58. 4. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. 5. Solvent-Based Clear Sealer System: a. First Coat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors, MPI #104. b. Topcoat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors, MPI #104. C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 12 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 3. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 4. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #151. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #153. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #154. 5. Alkyd System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Sealer Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. c. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. g. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. D. Steel Substrates: 1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 13 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. c. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. d. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" where substrate is specified. e. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. j. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. k. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. c. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. d. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" where substrate is specified. e. Topcoat: Dry fall, latex, flat, MPI #118. f. Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #133. 3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 4. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. c. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. d. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" where substrate is specified. e. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 14 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 5. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #151. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #153. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #154. 6. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. c. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. d. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" where substrate is specified. e. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. g. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. h. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. i. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. 7. Quick-Drying Enamel System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #81. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, gloss (Gloss Level 7), MPI #96. 8. Alkyd Dry-Fall System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. c. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. d. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" where substrate is specified. e. Topcoat: Dry fall, alkyd, flat, MPI #55. 9. Aluminum Paint System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. c. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 15 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
d. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" where substrate is specified. e. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. f. Topcoat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: a. Prime Coat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #133. b. Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #133. 3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 4. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 5. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating Over Waterborne Primer System: Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 16 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #151. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #153. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #154. 6. Aluminum Paint System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. F. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 3. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 17 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 4. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #151. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #153. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #154. 5. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80. b. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. c. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. g. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. 6. Aluminum Paint System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. G. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork, doors, windows, wood-based panel products, as indicated on the Drawings or as confirmed by the Company Representative. 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 2. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 18 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 4. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 5. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. H. Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Paint System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3), MPI #60. c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3), MPI #60. 2. Alkyd Floor Enamel System: Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 19 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
a. Prime Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. c. Topcoat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27. I. Fiberglass and Plastic Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17. b. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17. b. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 3. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17. b. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 4. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17. b. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 20 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, and matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #151. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #153. f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #154. 5. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17. b. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69. c. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. g. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. J. Gypsum Board and/or Plaster Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 3. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 21 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 4. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #151. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #153. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #154. 5. Alkyd over Latex Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. K. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: 1. Latex (Flat) System: Spray applied. a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. 2. Latex System: Spray applied. a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 3. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 22 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 4. Alkyd (Flat) System: a. Prime Coat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. b. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. 5. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. L. Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. Refer to the Drawings. 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114. 2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 3. Alkyd over Latex Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 23 of 23 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48. 4. Aluminum Paint System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. END OF SECTION 099123
Ove Arup & Partners Ltd
www.arup.com
Besix King Abdullah Sports City SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-20006 REV A | 27 January 2012
CONTRACT
This report takes into account the particular instructions and requirements of our client. It is not intended for and should not be relied upon by any third party and no responsibility is undertaken to any third party.
Job number 218250
King Abdullah Sports City INTUMESCENT PAINTING 65
KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200065 |Contract A | 27 January \\GLOBAL\LONDON\KASC2\4 INTERNAL DATA\06 SPECIFICATIONS\02 ARCHITECTU
Document Verification
Job title King Abdullah Sports City SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS Document title SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING
Document ref KASC-XX- Revision Date Filename
Revision A 27 January 2012 Description
Name Signature
Filename Description
Name Signature
Filename Description
Name Signature
Filename Description
Name Signature
27 January 2012 URAL\CONTRACT ISSUE\TITLE PAGES\SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING TITLE .DOCX Document Verification King Abdullah Sports City Job number 218250 SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING File reference
Contract issue. Document number revised. Notes and clarifications page added. Prepared by Checked by Jan Pratt Jan Pratt
Prepared by Checked by
Prepared by Checked by
Prepared by Checked by
Issue Document Verification with Document
Job number 218250 File reference SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING.docx issue. Document number revised. Notes and Approved by Mark Jeffs
Approved by
Approved by
Approved by
Verification with Document
Besix King Abdullah Sports City SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING
KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200065|Contract A | 27 January 2012 \\GLOBAL\LONDON\KASC2\4 INTERNAL DATA\06 SPECIFICATIONS\02 ARCHITECTURAL\CONTRACT ISSUE\TITLE PAGES\SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING TITLE .DOCX Page 1
Notes and Clarifications
1. The document number for this specification has been amended since Reference Design. The number was; WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING Reference Design Now reads; KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ- 200065 SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING Revision A Contract
2. Specification requirements are as the following pages with the following amendments:- a) None. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 Rev 1.0 | August 2011 REFERENCE DESIGN
SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 2 of 9 SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This is a design build/ contractor engineered section. Work includes structural design, drawings, obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction, fabricating, finishing and installation of the works described. B. Section includes surface preparation and application of fire-retardant intumescent paint to interior and exterior items and surfaces. Fire retardant intumescent paint shall be of two broad types, architectural grade paint for exposed areas and performance only based applications for plant spaces and concealed steelwork. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for primers, finish coats, and wood stains that may be used with intumescent paint finishes. D. T-Sheet Component or Elements: 1. Type FP-201 Intumescent paint. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include manufacturer's recommended spreading rate for each separate coat for each type of substrate indicated. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2 that specifies coatings approved by MPI, with the proposed product highlighted. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each intumescent paint finish indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of intumescent paint finish indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, not less than 200 mm square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. Arup Gulf Ltd 13 Fitzroy Street London W1T 4BQ arup.com Job number 214607 Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 3 of 9 SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: For each intumescent paint. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. None in Contract. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each paint system from single source from single manufacturer or provide a system approved in writing by intumescent paint manufacturer. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: To meet regulatory codes and other requirements and to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less . C. MPI Standards: Comply with indicated requirements for the following: 1. Products: MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. D. Mockups: Apply benchmark Samples of paint system indicated and of each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. For mockup requirements, refer to schedule. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as confirmed by the Company Representative. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 4 of 9 SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne intumescent paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 10 and 32 deg C. B. Apply solvent-thinned intumescent paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 7 and 35 deg C. C. Do not apply intumescent paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. D. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and to attain temperature and conditions specified before starting or continuing coating operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTUMESCENT PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each material or coat, provide products and spreading rates recommended in writing by intumescent paint manufacturer for use on substrate indicated. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant coating classification and surface-burning characteristics indicated. B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 6. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 7. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. C. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Colors and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval.. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 5 of 9 SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
2.2 EXTERIOR, PIGMENTED, INTUMESCENT PAINT SYSTEM A. Primer: Intumescent paint manufacturer's recommended primer, if required, compatible with substrate and other materials indicated. 1. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. B. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint and Overcoat: Fire-retardant paint for exterior wood surfaces and fire-inert, weather-resistant, protective overcoat that will not affect fire-retardant class of intumescent coating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, or available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 149; flat finish and No. 400; semigloss finish. b. Magna Coatings Technology Inc.; SafeCoat Exterior Intumescent and SafeCoat 725 Sealer/Overcoat; satin, semigloss or gloss finish. c. Thermoguard; Thermocoat. 2. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. 2.3 INTERIOR, PIGMENTED, INTUMESCENT PAINT SYSTEM A. Primer: Intumescent paint manufacturer's recommended primer compatible with substrate and other materials indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative. a. or Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; latex primer approved by manufacturer. b. PPG Industries, Inc.; Speed Hide 6-6 interior quick-drying enamel undercoater. c. Thermoguard; Thermocoat. 2. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. B. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint: Solvent-based, modified-alkyd-type, fire- retardant paint for interior wood and other combustible surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 10-10 or No. 10-10A; flat finish. b. Albi Manufacturing; a division of StanChem, Inc.; Albi-Cote 107A; flat finish. c. Thermoguard; Thermocoat. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 6 of 9 SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
d. To be selected from the manufacturer's standard range by the Company Representative to conform to the performance requirements and the design intent of the drawings. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E1, E2 or E3. 3. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. C. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint: Water-based, latex-type, fire-retardant paint for interior wood and other combustible surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 320A. c. International Fire Resistant Systems, Inc.; Firefree88; flat finish. d. Thermoguard. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E1, E2 or E3. 3. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approvalAs confirmed by the Company Representative... D. Topcoat/Overcoat: Solvent-based, alkyd-type, pigmented, fire-inert, protective- finish coating that will not affect fire-retardant class of intumescent coating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 30-30; semigloss finish or No. 666A; semigloss finish. b. International Fire Resistant Systems, Inc.; coating approved by International Fire Resistant Systems. c. Thermoguard. 2. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval. E. Topcoat/Overcoat: Water-based, latex-type, pigmented, fire-inert, protective-finish coating that will not affect fire-retardant class of intumescent coating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative. a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; no coating required No. 40-40; low gloss finish. b. Albi Manufacturing; a division of StanChem, Inc.; no coating required Albi-Cote TC Latex Semi Gloss. c. Thermoguard. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E1, E2 or E3. 3. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 7 of 9 SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
2.4 INTERIOR, CLEAR, INTUMESCENT PAINT SYSTEM A. Stain Coat: Factory-formulated, nonbleeding, solvent-based, alkyd-type penetrating wood stain. 1. Stain approved by intumescent paint manufacturer. B. Clear Sanding Sealer: Solvent-based, modified-alkyd type for interior wood surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative. a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 6 Clear Wood Sealer. b. Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; sealer approved by Fire Research Laboratories. c. Thermoguard. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E1, E2 or E3. 3. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements.. C. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint: Solvent- or water-based, fire-retardant paint for interior wood and other combustible surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative. a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 166; satin finish. b. Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; ClearCoat II; flat or satin finish. c. Thermoguard. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E1, E2 or E3. 3. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. D. Topcoat/Overcoat: Protective fire-inert clear coating that will not affect fire-test- response characteristics of intumescent coating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative. a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 167; low gloss, semigloss] or gloss finish. b. Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; TopCoat A; flat, satin, semigloss or gloss finish. c. Thermoguard. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E1, E2 or E3. 3. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 8 of 9 SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements for surface treatments, shop-primed surfaces, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Begin coating only when moisture content of wood substrate is 15 percent or less when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Begin coating no sooner than 28 days, or as confirmed by the Company Representative, after substrate is constructed and is visually dry on both sides. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions, and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in the "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants, that could impair bond of coatings. Do not coat surfaces if surface moisture content or alkalinity exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove incompatible primers, and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. 2. Perform cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply intumescent paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with requirements for fire-retardant coating classification. 1. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 9 of 9 SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
2. Coat surfaces behind movable items the same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Apply each coat separately according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Finish doors on faces with intumescent finish. Paint tops, bottoms, and side edges with fire-inert finish. B. Apply coatings to prepared surfaces as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface soiling or deterioration. C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 1. Pigmented Finishes: If undercoats or other conditions show through pigmented topcoat/overcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. 2. Clear Finishes: Produce a smooth surface film of even sheen using multiple coats. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Company Representative, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.5 PAINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Prime Coat: If required and approved by intumescent paint manufacturer. B. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Coating: Minimum two coats to comply with requirements for fire-retardant coating classification and surface-burning characteristics indicated. C. Topcoat/Overcoat: Apply if required or recommended and approved by intumescent paint manufacturer. END OF SECTION 099646